WO2021042243A1 - Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices - Google Patents

Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021042243A1
WO2021042243A1 PCT/CN2019/104041 CN2019104041W WO2021042243A1 WO 2021042243 A1 WO2021042243 A1 WO 2021042243A1 CN 2019104041 W CN2019104041 W CN 2019104041W WO 2021042243 A1 WO2021042243 A1 WO 2021042243A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network device
working mode
information
configuration
terminal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/104041
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
余健
李秉肇
邵家枫
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201980097116.2A priority Critical patent/CN113906822A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2019/104041 priority patent/WO2021042243A1/en
Publication of WO2021042243A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021042243A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for switching the working mode of dual-connected network devices in the field of communications.
  • Wireless communication technology has undergone long-term evolution and development.
  • the main network equipment and auxiliary network equipment are usually deployed in the same area.
  • the terminal equipment can support simultaneous access to the main network equipment and the auxiliary network equipment.
  • data can be transmitted with the main network equipment and the auxiliary network equipment at the same time.
  • the randomness of the amount of communication data leads to the randomness of the load of the network equipment.
  • the main network equipment can meet the data transmission rate.
  • network equipment Since network equipment has large static power consumption (that is, the internal energy loss when the network equipment is running at no load, such as the operating power loss of power amplifiers, intermediate frequency, radio frequency and other modules), in order to reduce the power consumption of auxiliary network equipment, it is usually necessary Turn off some hardware modules of the auxiliary network device.
  • the auxiliary network device when the load of the auxiliary network device is less than a preset threshold, the auxiliary network device is turned off to reduce the power consumption of the auxiliary network device; when the load of the main network device is greater than the preset threshold or a mobile device that requires a high transmission rate is connected , The auxiliary network device needs to be restarted. Due to the randomness of the data transmission volume, the load of the primary and secondary network equipment is too high or too low, which may cause repeated shutdown operations on the secondary network equipment. Each time the auxiliary network device is shut down or started, the terminal needs to reconfigure the parameters of the auxiliary network device to be accessed, resulting in data transmission delay.
  • the shutdown time of the auxiliary network equipment is reduced and the user experience is reduced; on the other hand, when the delay is too large at that time, even if the dual connection is turned on, the delay requirement cannot be met, and the auxiliary network equipment energy is wasted.
  • the terminal after closing the auxiliary network device, the terminal cannot detect the auxiliary network device information.
  • the terminal device When the dual connection is to be turned on, in order to obtain the best matching auxiliary network device, the terminal device needs to be connected twice (that is, re-search for the synchronization information of the auxiliary network device, re-read the system message, re-measure and report the area, etc.), Severely cause data delay; in order to avoid secondary access of terminal equipment, the main network equipment randomly adds auxiliary network equipment, which causes the auxiliary network equipment added by the main network equipment to not meet the higher data transmission speed, and also affects the data transmission rate .
  • the present application provides a method and device for switching the working mode of dual-connection network equipment.
  • the first working mode is converted to the second working mode.
  • Switching from the second working mode to the first working mode effectively reduces the power consumption of the base station while ensuring the data transmission rate between the base station and the terminal.
  • the present application provides a method for switching the operating mode of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to the first network device, and the method includes: determining whether a triggering condition of the operating mode transition is satisfied; and in response to satisfying the operating mode transition Sending a working mode switch request to the second network device; sending first indication information for instructing the working mode switch to the terminal connected to the second network device; the working mode includes: first working Mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving mode, and the second working mode is an energy-saving mode.
  • the working mode conversion shown in the present application includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
  • the first network device in the dual connection system of the present application determines that the triggering condition of the working mode conversion is satisfied, it sends a working mode conversion request to the second network device, so that the second network device performs the working mode conversion, so that the load Under low conditions, the second network device is made to enter the second working mode, which saves power consumption of the network device, and when the load is high, the second network device is made to enter the first working mode to increase the data transmission rate.
  • the first network device sends the first indication information of the work mode switch to the terminal connected to the second network device, so that the terminal performs the work mode switch, so that in the second work mode, the terminal can keep with the second network device. Signal synchronization.
  • the terminal When the second network device enters the second working mode, the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial to the terminal to quickly access the second network device when the first working mode is restored, reducing the cost of the second network device. Second, the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to increase the data transmission rate between the terminal and the network device.
  • both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode.
  • the synchronization signal includes PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal).
  • PSS and SSS are transmitted in SSB (Synchronization Signal Block, synchronization signal block), and PBCH channel (physical broadcast) Channel) together, are arranged in fixed time slot positions.
  • MIB Master Information Block, master system message
  • the second network device transmits reference signals (such as CSI-RS), synchronization signals, and MIBs for radio resource management RRM with a transmission period greater than that in the first working mode, so that the second network device can Turn on the related equipment when sending a signal, and turn off the related equipment when you stop sending a signal, so as to reduce power consumption.
  • reference signals such as CSI-RS
  • synchronization signals such as CSI-RS
  • MIBs radio resource management RRM
  • the method further includes: receiving response information of the operating mode conversion request from the second network device.
  • the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode
  • the triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  • the response information received from the second network device may include indication information indicating whether the second working mode can be entered currently.
  • the current data transmission between the second network device and the terminal has not been completed, and when it enters the energy-saving mode at this time, the data transmission with the terminal usually fails.
  • the first network device can determine the current working status of the second network device by receiving the response information. When it is determined that the second network device is currently performing data transmission, it can wait for the data of the second network device. After the transmission is completed, the second network device is instructed to enter the energy-saving mode to avoid data transmission failure.
  • the above-mentioned response information further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information includes at least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in the operating mode; used to indicate the configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second operating mode; Configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
  • the working mode switching method shown in this application further includes: receiving second indication information from the terminal, where the second indication information is used to indicate the terminal The configuration is complete; based on the received second indication information, third indication information is sent to the second network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  • the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
  • the trigger condition for the transition of the operating mode includes a trigger condition for transition from the second operating mode to the first operating mode, and the second operating mode is triggered by the second operating mode.
  • the trigger condition for the mode conversion to the first working mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is higher than a preset threshold; the data transmission rate requested by the terminal is high The data transmission rate of the first network device; the energy consumption of the first network is greater than a preset threshold, and the first network device and the second network device in the first working mode The sum of energy consumption is less than the energy consumption of the first network.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
  • the response information received from the second network device may include indication information indicating whether it is currently possible to enter the first working mode.
  • the first network device can determine the current working status of the second network device by receiving the response information.
  • the second network device can be instructed to enter the energy-saving mode after the second network device is updated, so as to prevent the terminal from being unable to access the second network device or failing to access the second network device. Perform data transmission with the second network device, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
  • the above response information further includes at least one of the following: the configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode; and the second network device in the first working mode Common channel configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in an operating mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate in the first operating mode Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement; used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
  • the working mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving second indication information from the terminal, and the second indication information is used At indicating that the terminal configuration is complete.
  • the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured.
  • the method for pre-configuring parameters includes: receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the second network device; setting the second network device in the second working mode The configuration information is sent to the terminal; the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include the configuration Identify one or more of corresponding common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
  • the reconfiguration by pre-configuring the parameters of the first working mode, it is not necessary to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time during the working mode conversion process.
  • the reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
  • the first network device can receive from the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  • the response information of the mode includes the configuration identifier.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: The state information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the second working mode.
  • the first network device can receive from the second network device to enter the first working mode.
  • Mode response information where the response information includes the configuration identifier in the second working mode.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: Information about the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the first operating mode.
  • the present application provides a method for switching the working mode of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a first network device, and the method includes: receiving a working mode switching request from a second network device; and based on the working mode switching request, Sending first indication information for instructing a work mode transition to a terminal connected to a second network device, the work mode including: a first work mode and a second work mode, wherein the first work mode is non-energy-saving work Mode, the second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
  • the work mode conversion includes one of the following: conversion from the first work mode to the second work mode; and conversion from the second work mode to the first work mode.
  • the working mode conversion shown in the second aspect can be initiated by the second network device. That is, after determining that the working mode conversion condition is satisfied, the second network device can send the working mode conversion request to the first network device. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
  • both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode.
  • the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
  • the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode
  • the triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  • the working mode switch request received from the second network device further includes at least one of the following: the second network device is in the second working mode, the common channel configuration information; the second network device is in the second working mode Configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information includes at least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in the operating mode; used to indicate the configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second operating mode; Configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
  • the working mode switching method shown in this application further includes: receiving a second instruction from the terminal Information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete; based on the received second indication information, third indication information is sent to the second network device, and the third indication information is used to indicate The terminal configuration is complete.
  • the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
  • the second network device in order to quickly enter the second working mode, does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information.
  • the second network device can After receiving the response information of the first network device, it directly enters the second working mode.
  • the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured.
  • the method for pre-configuring parameters includes: receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the second network device; setting the second network device in the second working mode The configuration information is sent to the terminal; the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include the configuration Identify one or more of corresponding common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
  • the reconfiguration by pre-configuring the parameters of the first working mode, it is not necessary to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time during the working mode conversion process.
  • the reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
  • the working mode conversion request received from the second network device further includes a configuration identifier.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: The state information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the second working mode.
  • the present application provides a method for switching the working mode of a dual-connection network device, applied to a second network device, and the method includes: receiving a working mode switching request from the first network device; based on the working mode switching request, Sending response information of the working mode conversion request to the first network device; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and The second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
  • the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
  • the second network device may receive a working mode switch request from the first network device to perform the working mode switch, so that the second network device enters the second working mode under the condition of low load.
  • the power consumption of the network device is saved, and the second network device enters the first working mode when the load is high, and the data transmission rate is increased.
  • the second network device may send response information to the first network device after receiving the working mode switch request, so that the first network device can send the first indication information to the terminal connected to the second network device based on the response information , So that in the second working mode, the terminal can maintain signal synchronization with the second network device.
  • the terminal When the second network device enters the second working mode, the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial in restoring the second network device.
  • the terminal In the first working mode, the terminal can quickly access the second network device, reducing the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the second working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to improve the communication between the terminal and the network device. Data transfer rate.
  • both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode.
  • the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  • the response message sent to the first network device may include an indication of whether the second network device can enter the second network device. Instruction information of working mode.
  • the current data transmission between the second network device and the terminal has not been completed, and when it enters the energy-saving mode at this time, the data transmission with the terminal fails.
  • the first network device can instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode after the data transmission of the second network device is completed, so as to avoid data transmission failure.
  • the above-mentioned response information further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  • the operating mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving third indication information from the first network device, and the third The indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is completed; based on the third indication information, enter the second working mode.
  • the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
  • the second network device in order to quickly enter the second working mode, does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information.
  • the second network device can After receiving the request from the first network device to switch from the first working mode to the second working mode, it directly enters the second working mode.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
  • the second network device when the second operating mode is converted to the first operating mode, after receiving the operating mode transition request, the second network device sends a request to the first network device based on its current operating state.
  • the sending response information may include indication information indicating whether it is currently possible to enter the first working mode.
  • the first network device when the second network device is currently unable to perform the first working mode due to configuration information errors or other reasons, the first network device is notified through the instruction information, so that the first network device can determine the second network device
  • the second network device can be instructed to enter the energy-saving mode after the second network device is updated, so as to prevent the terminal from being unable to access the second network device or being unable to communicate with the second network device after accessing the second network device. Perform data transmission, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
  • the above response information further includes at least one of the following: the configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode; and the second network device in the first working mode Common channel configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
  • the operating mode conversion method performed by the second network device shown in this application further includes: receiving a random access request from the terminal; and responding to It is determined that the random access of the terminal succeeds and enters the first working mode.
  • the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured.
  • the method for pre-configuring parameters performed by a second network device includes: sending configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the first network device; and the second network device is working in the second mode.
  • the configuration information in the mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, and configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement And one or more of the configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the response information includes: the configuration identifier.
  • This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time.
  • the reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
  • the response information sent by the second network device to the first network device includes the configuration identifier.
  • the response information may further include indication information used to indicate whether the second network device can enter the second working mode.
  • the response information sent by the second network device to the first network device includes the configuration identifier.
  • the response information may further include indication information used to indicate whether the second network device can enter the first working mode.
  • the present application provides a working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a second network device, and the method includes: determining whether a trigger condition of a working mode conversion is satisfied; and responding to satisfying the triggering of the working mode conversion Condition, sending a working mode conversion request to the first network device; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and the second working mode is Energy-saving working mode.
  • the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
  • the working mode conversion shown in the fourth aspect can be initiated by the second network device. That is, after determining that the working mode conversion condition is satisfied, the second network device can send the working mode conversion request to the first network device. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
  • both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode.
  • the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
  • the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode
  • the triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
  • the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  • the working mode switch request sent by the second network device further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; and the use of the second network device in the second working mode RRM measurement configuration information for radio resource management; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  • the working mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving third indication information from the first network device, and the third The indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is completed; based on the third indication information, enter the second working mode.
  • the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
  • the second network device in order to quickly enter the second working mode, does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information.
  • the second network device can After receiving the response information sent by the first network device, it directly enters the second working mode.
  • the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode may be pre-configured.
  • the method for pre-configuring parameters performed by a second network device includes: sending configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the first network device; and the second network device is working in the second mode.
  • the configuration information in the mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, and configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement And one or more of the configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the response information includes: the configuration identifier.
  • This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time.
  • the reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
  • the working mode conversion request sent by the second network device to the first network device further includes Configuration identification.
  • the present application provides a working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a terminal, and the method includes: receiving, from a first network device, first indication information for instructing a working mode conversion of a second network device; Configure parameters for accessing the second network based on the first indication information; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode , The second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
  • the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
  • the terminal receives the first indication information from the first network device, so that the terminal can configure the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode or in the first working mode, so that the terminal can communicate with each other in the second working mode.
  • the second network device maintains signal synchronization.
  • the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial for the terminal to quickly access the second network when the first working mode is restored.
  • the device reduces the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the second working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to increase the data transmission rate between the terminal and the network device.
  • both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode.
  • the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
  • the operating mode conversion includes converting from the first operating mode to the second operating mode;
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: Indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; used to indicate the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the second operating mode; Configuration information for instructing the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode; configuration information for instructing the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode ; Used to indicate the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
  • the work mode conversion includes conversion from the second work mode to the first work mode
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: Information indicating the state of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the first operating mode; For indicating the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode; for indicating the configuration information for the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode; Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the first network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  • the method further includes: sending a random access request to the second network device.
  • the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode may be pre-configured.
  • the method for pre-configuring parameters executed by the terminal includes: receiving from the first network device the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the second network device in the second working mode
  • the configuration information includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement, and One or more items of configuration information of channel state information CSI measurement;
  • the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
  • This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time.
  • the reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
  • the first indication information further includes At least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; used to indicate the second network device in the second operating mode The status information of the carrier.
  • the first indication information further includes At least one of the following: information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the second network device in the first operating mode The status information of the carrier.
  • first working mode described in the first aspect to the fifth aspect may be a dual-connection working mode, and the second working mode may be an energy-saving working mode.
  • the first working mode and the second working mode may also be other working modes, which are not specifically limited here.
  • a communication device configured to execute any of the foregoing aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any aspect.
  • the communication device includes a unit for executing any one of the foregoing aspects or a method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the aspects.
  • a communication device in a seventh aspect, includes a processor and a transceiver.
  • the device may further include a memory and a bus system.
  • the transceiver, the memory, and the processor are connected through the bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute instructions, such as executing instructions stored in the memory, to control the transceiver to receive and/or send signals
  • the processor executes an instruction, for example, executes an instruction stored in the memory, the execution causes the processor or the communication device to execute any of the foregoing aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any aspect.
  • a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing a method in any possible implementation manner of any of the foregoing aspects.
  • a computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is used by a communication unit, a processing unit, or a transceiver of a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device) When the processor is running, the communication device is allowed to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of any of the foregoing aspects.
  • a chip in a tenth aspect, is provided.
  • the chip can be applied to a communication device.
  • the chip includes at least one processor.
  • the at least one processor executes an instruction
  • the chip or the communication device executes any of the above aspects.
  • the chip may further include a memory, and the memory may be used to store related instructions.
  • a communication system including the above-mentioned first network device, second network device, and terminal.
  • Figure 1a shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 1b shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a main network device, a secondary network device, and a terminal that are deployed on different sites according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 1c shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1d shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the main network device, the auxiliary network device, and the terminal that are deployed on the same site according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from an energy-saving working mode to a dual-connection working mode according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for pre-configuring parameters of an energy-saving working mode according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • NR new radio interface
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • 5G future 5th generation
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • access terminal user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • a handheld device with a wireless connection function for example, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality.
  • augmented reality, AR equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids
  • Wireless terminals in transportation safety transportation safety
  • wireless terminals in smart city smart city
  • wireless terminals in smart home smart home
  • cellular phones cordless phones
  • session initiation protocol session initiation protocol
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • handheld device with wireless communication function computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem
  • vehicle Devices wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network or terminal devices in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminal equipment.
  • the network equipment may also be referred to as an access network equipment or a wireless access network equipment, which may be
  • the evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station or an access device.
  • Points, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, and access devices in the future 5G network or access devices in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., can be access points (AP) in WLANs, and can be new wireless systems
  • the gNB in the (new radio, NR) system is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the network equipment may also be equipment in the RAN (Radio Access Network, radio access network), or in other words, the terminal equipment is connected to The RAN node of the wireless network.
  • a network device it can include: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC) ), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), Baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wifi) access point (AP), etc.
  • the access device provides services for the cell, and the terminal device communicates with the access device through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell, and the cell may be corresponding to the access device (for example, a base station) A cell.
  • a cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, and micro cell. Femto cells, etc., these small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • the carrier in the LTE system or the 5G system can have multiple cells working at the same frequency at the same time.
  • the concept of the above-mentioned carrier and the cell can also be regarded as equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the concept of carrier and cell is equivalent, for example, a terminal device accessing a carrier is equivalent to accessing a cell.
  • FIG. 1a shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can be connected to two network devices at the same time, and this access method is called dual-connectivity (DC).
  • DC dual-connectivity
  • the two network devices the one that is responsible for interacting with the terminal device for radio resource control messages and for interacting with the core network control plane entity is the first network device, which can also be called the main network device, and the other network device is the second network device.
  • Network equipment can also be called auxiliary network equipment.
  • the terminal device can also have a communication connection with multiple access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called multi-connectivity or multi-connectivity (multi-connectivity, MC).
  • multiple access devices there can be An access device is responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device, and is responsible for interacting with the core network control plane entity.
  • the network device can be called the main network device, and the rest of the network devices can be called the auxiliary network device. .
  • the first network device and the second network device may be network devices of the same wireless access type.
  • the first network device and the second network device may be network devices of the LTE system, or may be network devices of the NR system.
  • the main network device and the auxiliary network device may also be network devices of different wireless access types.
  • the main network device is a network device of the LTE system, and the auxiliary network device is a network device of the NR system; or, the main network device is a network device of the NR system, and the auxiliary network device is a network device of the LTE system.
  • the main network device and the auxiliary network device can communicate with each other through an interface, so that the main network device can learn various information of the auxiliary network device.
  • the information may include, but is not limited to, the load and resource utilization of the auxiliary network device, for example.
  • the auxiliary network device can also learn information such as load and resource utilization of the main network device.
  • E-UTRA NR DC (referred to as EN-DC) architecture
  • LTE network equipment such as LTE eNB
  • NR network equipment such as gNB
  • the core network equipment is EPC.
  • the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and provides air interface transmission resources for data between the terminal device and the EPC.
  • the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface
  • the gNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal equipment and the EPC.
  • NR network equipment such as gNB
  • LTE network equipment such as ng eNB
  • the core network equipment is 5GC.
  • gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC; or gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface, ng-eNB Connect to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
  • This architecture can also be called option 7 series. That is, the LTE network equipment (such as ng-gNB) is used as the main network equipment, the NR network equipment (such as gNB) is used as the secondary network equipment for DC, and the core network equipment is 5GC.
  • ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC; or ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface
  • GNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
  • the first network device and the second network device may be access network devices deployed on different sites.
  • Fig. 1a a situation where the first network device and the second network device are set at different sites is shown.
  • each network device includes a processor and a transceiver to receive various signals from the terminal, or send a signal to the terminal, and process the signal.
  • Fig. 1b shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the first network device, the second network device and the terminal deployed on different sites.
  • the first network device communicates with the terminal through the transceiver 1; the second network device communicates with the terminal through the transceiver 2; the terminal can communicate with the first network device and the second network at the same time through the transceiver 3.
  • the device communicates.
  • the first network device and the second network device may also be network devices deployed on the same site.
  • FIG. 1c shows a schematic diagram of yet another network architecture applied to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1c shows a situation where the first network device and the second network device are set at the same site.
  • the first network device and the second network device can share the same transceiver to communicate with the terminal.
  • FIG. 1d shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal deployed on the same site. It can be seen from FIG. 1d that the first network device includes a processor 1 and the second network device includes a processor 2. And the two share the transceiver 3. That is, both the first network device and the second network device communicate with the terminal through the transceiver 3.
  • the first network device and the second network device are not fixed, that is to say, in some cases (for example, the second network device is responsible for interacting with the terminal device wireless resources In the case of the control message), the second network device can be used as the main network device, and the first network device can be used as the auxiliary network device. There is no specific limitation here.
  • the auxiliary network device may have two working modes, a first working mode and a second working mode.
  • the auxiliary network device in the first working mode, communicates with the terminal and transmits data, which is also called a non-energy-saving working mode at this time.
  • the non-energy-saving working mode may include a multi-connection working mode, a dual-connection working mode, and so on.
  • the auxiliary network device and the terminal do not perform data transmission, which is also called the energy-saving working mode at this time.
  • the first working mode is referred to as a dual-connection working mode
  • the second working mode is referred to as an energy-saving working mode, so as to describe the application in detail.
  • first working mode and the second working mode in this application can also be named with other names. As long as they conform to the working methods of the first working mode and the second working mode, they all fall into the first job shown in this application. Mode, the second working mode range.
  • the network equipment In the dual-connection working mode, the network equipment has higher power consumption.
  • the load of the network device When the load of the network device is low, there is no need to transmit data to the terminal through dual connections, and only the main network device is sufficient to bear the load, the auxiliary network device may be empty or the load may be lower than the preset value.
  • components such as power amplifiers and radio frequency units in the auxiliary network equipment still have relatively large static power consumption, so that the power consumption of the auxiliary network equipment will not be reduced due to the reduction of the low load.
  • the auxiliary network device needs to delete the configuration information of the terminal connected to the auxiliary network device; when the auxiliary network device is turned on to enable the terminal to resume dual connections, The auxiliary network device needs to re-add the configuration information of the terminal connected to the auxiliary network device.
  • the time delay is serious. For example, the delay usually reaches a hundred milliseconds or more.
  • the time delay for the terminal to access the auxiliary network device is severe, which greatly reduces the user's data download speed and reduces the user experience.
  • the terminal can simultaneously perform data transmission with the main network device and the auxiliary network device to increase the data transmission rate of the terminal network.
  • the auxiliary network device In the energy-saving working mode, the auxiliary network device periodically shuts down or turns on the hardware modules with high static power consumption in the auxiliary network device, such as the radio frequency device, to achieve the purpose of reducing the power consumption of the auxiliary network device.
  • the auxiliary network device sends a radio resource management (RRM) measurement reference signal and a synchronization signal/broadcast channel (SS/PBCH block, SSB) with a period longer than the dual-connection working mode.
  • RRM radio resource management
  • SS/PBCH block, SSB synchronization signal/broadcast channel
  • the auxiliary network device when the load is low, the auxiliary network device enters the energy-saving mode, and the terminal configuration information stored in the auxiliary network device is not released, so that when the auxiliary network device resumes the dual connection mode, the terminal can quickly establish a connection with the auxiliary network device. Increase the data transmission rate of the terminal, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the first network device (that is, the main network device) is the LTE network device
  • the second network device (that is, the auxiliary network device) is the NR network.
  • the equipment is used to indicate. This application is not limited to this. It can also be a combination of other types of network equipment.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic flow chart of a conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 2 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the operations in FIG. 2 Deformation of the operation. As shown in FIG. 2, the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include steps 201-207.
  • the first network device determines whether a trigger condition for switching from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode is met.
  • the trigger condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include one or more of the following:
  • the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold; the first network device and the first network device 2.
  • the load or resource utilization of the network device is lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than the fourth preset threshold, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold .
  • the load of the first network device or the load of the second network device can be regarded as the amount of communication data transmission with the terminal.
  • the load of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold, or it is detected that the load of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold, or the first network device and the second network device are detected
  • the load is lower than the third preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal data transmission volume is low, and only the first network device is sufficient to undertake the data transmission with the terminal, and the data transmission rate is not less than the preset threshold.
  • the second network device can be triggered to enter the energy-saving working mode.
  • Examples of the resources in the above resource utilization rate may include, but are not limited to: resources allocated or reserved for terminal devices, dedicated user plane connections between terminal devices and the core network, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the resources allocated or reserved for the terminal device may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, and so on.
  • the dedicated user plane connection between the terminal device and the core network may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, NG-U transport layer address information allocated to the terminal device, and the core network allocates the terminal device At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information.
  • the resource utilization rate of the first network device and the second network device may also include frequency domain resource utilization rate and time domain resource utilization rate.
  • the time domain resource can be one or more symbols, one or more time slots, one or more mini-slots, or one or more subframes.
  • the frequency domain resource can be one or more RBs, one or more REs, one or more carriers, one or more cells, or one or more bandwidth parts. , BWP).
  • the resource utilization rate of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold value
  • the resource utilization rate of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold value
  • the resource utilization rates of the first network device and the second network device When it is lower than the third preset threshold value, it indicates that the terminal data transmission volume is low, and only the first network device is sufficient to undertake the data transmission with the terminal, and the data transmission rate is not less than the preset threshold value.
  • the second network device can be triggered to enter the energy-saving working mode.
  • the first network device When detecting that the trigger condition for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied, the first network device sends a working mode switching request for switching from the dual-connection mode to the energy-saving working mode to the second network device.
  • the first network device may send a request to enter the energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
  • the first network device may send bitstream data to the second network device, directly instructing the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode.
  • the first network device may use a bitmap to send a request to the second network device, and at the same time use a bit to inquire whether the second network device can enter the energy-saving mode.
  • the first network device detects that the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than a certain threshold, at this time, the second network device and a terminal may have a situation where the data transmission has not been completed. .
  • data transmission with the terminal usually fails.
  • the first network device requests the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode by adopting an inquiry method, and can enter the energy-saving mode after the data transmission of the second network device is completed, so as to avoid data transmission failure.
  • the first network device when it sends a request to enter the energy-saving mode to the second network device, it may further include configuration parameters that need to be returned by the second network device.
  • the configuration parameters that the first network device may request the second network device to return include, but are not limited to, at least one of the following: common channel configuration information for the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; The configuration information for the RRM measurement in the radio resource management; the configuration information for the channel state information CSI measurement of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode.
  • the common channel configuration information includes, but is not limited to, the transmission period of the synchronization signal carried by the common channel and system messages.
  • the information used for RRM measurement includes the resource index for the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, measurement period, measurement bandwidth, etc., including but not limited to: subcarrier interval: indicates the subcarrier interval of CSI-RS; CSI-RS resource Index: indicates the CSI-RS resource number; CSI-RS start symbol position: indicates the super-initial symbol of the CSI-RS time domain; CSI-RS frequency domain position indicator: indicates the position of the CSI-RS in the frequency domain; CSI-RS sequence The generated scrambling code ID; CSI-RS measurement period; CSI-RS measurement bandwidth, indicating which RBs are used for measurement; measurement cell ID.
  • subcarrier interval indicates the subcarrier interval of CSI-RS
  • CSI-RS resource Index indicates the CSI-RS resource number
  • CSI-RS start symbol position indicates the super-initial symbol of the CSI-RS time domain
  • CSI-RS frequency domain position indicator indicates the position of the CSI-RS in the frequency domain
  • CSI-RS sequence The generated scrambling
  • the CSI-RS information used for RRM measurement can be reconfigured, such as changing the subcarrier spacing, changing the position of the CSI-RS start symbol, etc.; or, for the existing CSI-RS information used for RRM measurement, Only the period used for RRM measurement is changed.
  • the configuration information used for RRM measurement includes at least the CSI-RS index and the RRM measurement period.
  • the configuration information used for CSI measurement may include, but is not limited to: CSI-RS resource measurement information, and CSI feedback period.
  • CSI-RS resource measurement information For details, please refer to the CSI-MeasConfig related information in the standard 38.331, which will not be repeated here.
  • the CSI-RS information used for CSI measurement can be reconfigured; or, for the existing CSI-RS information used for CSI measurement, only the CSI-RS resource measurement information used for CSI measurement can be changed. Feedback period.
  • the configuration information used for CSI measurement includes at least CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource measurement information, and CSI feedback period.
  • the configuration parameters can be requested in the form of bitmaps, one of which can represent a configuration parameter inquired.
  • the first network device can request the second device for the configuration parameters of the second device in the energy-saving working mode, which preferably include the SSB transmission period and the RRM measurement period; in addition, it can also be requested
  • the configuration parameters include, but are not limited to, SSB frequency domain position, RRM measurement resources, CSI measurement resources, and measurement period.
  • the query parameter configuration parameters are SSB transmission period and RRM measurement period, you can set the position corresponding to the SSB transmission period and RRM measurement period to "1" in the 10-bit bitmap, and the remaining positions "0".
  • the configuration parameters of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode may not be asked.
  • the second network device sends response information for entering the energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
  • the second network device may send to the first network device a response message of accepting entering the energy-saving working mode or refusing to enter the energy-saving working mode.
  • the response information can take a 1-bit value. Specifically, when the bit value is “1”, it may indicate that the entry into the working mode is accepted; when the bit value is “0”, it may indicate that the entry into the energy-saving working mode is refused.
  • the second network device and the terminal are currently performing data transmission, and if the data transmission fails when entering the energy-saving working mode, the second network device may refuse to enter the energy-saving working mode at this time.
  • the bitstream when the second network device refuses to enter the energy-saving working mode, the bitstream may also be used to indicate the value of the reason for the refusal.
  • the cause value may indicate that data transmission is currently being performed, for example.
  • the response information of the second network device may include at least one of the following: common channel configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; and the second network device in the energy-saving working mode Configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in an energy-saving working mode.
  • the first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
  • the second network device may manage a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG), and the SCG may include one or more carriers.
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • the SCG may include one or more carriers.
  • the SCG contains multiple carriers, each SCG can be divided into multiple logical cells, the multiple logical cells include primary and secondary cells (Primary Secondary Cell, PScell), and one or more secondary cells (Secondary Cell, abbreviated as Scell).
  • PScell Primary Secondary Cell
  • Scell Secondary Cell
  • Each logical cell corresponds to a carrier in the second network device (for example, a carrier or a carrier formed by carrier aggregation).
  • the carrier corresponding to the PScell may be referred to as the primary carrier. If only one carrier is included in the SCG, the logical cell corresponding to the carrier is the PScell.
  • the mapping relationship between the terminal and the SCG may be established, that is, one terminal may correspond to one or more SCGs.
  • the first network device may instruct the SCG to deactivate, or instruct the carrier in the SCG to deactivate.
  • the carrier in the SCG is instructed to deactivate, that is, the logical cell is instructed to deactivate.
  • deactivation is also inactive.
  • the terminal can perform measurements on the second network device, but cannot perform data transmission with the second network device.
  • data transmission does not include RRM measurement and common channel transmission.
  • the first network device may instruct some or all of the carriers in the second network device to work in a deactivated state. Generally, the more the number of carriers working in the deactivated state, the lower the power consumption of the second network device.
  • the first network device may determine the number of carriers in the deactivated state in the second network device according to the load status, energy consumption, etc. of the second network device.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information includes the terminal ID, so as to indicate which terminals enter the energy-saving working mode.
  • the first indication information also includes the SCG index and the carrier index.
  • the SCG index is used to indicate which SCG enters the deactivated state
  • the carrier index is used to indicate which carrier in the SCG enters the deactivated state.
  • both the SCG index and the carrier index can be set in a bitmap manner. Taking the SCG index as an example, each bit in the bitmap represents an SCG. In the bitmap, when the value representing a certain SCG is "0", it can indicate that the SCG has entered the deactivated state; when the value representing a certain SCG is "1", it can indicate that the SCG is in the activated state.
  • the first network device may set all the carriers in the second network device in a deactivated state. Therefore, the first indication information may indicate that the carriers in the second network device are all working in a deactivated state.
  • the first network device may set the PScell in the SCG corresponding to the second network device to a dormant state.
  • the first indication information may indicate that the PScell in the second network device is working in a dormant state, and indicate that other carriers in the SCG are working in a deactivated state.
  • the terminal when the carrier in the second network device is set to the dormant state, the terminal needs to perform CSI measurement and reporting on the second network device; when the carrier in the second network device is set to the deactivated state, the terminal does not It is necessary to perform CSI measurement and report on the second network device.
  • the first indication information may also include configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and configuration information used by the second network device for CSI measurement in the energy-saving working mode.
  • the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through MAC CE signaling.
  • the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through DCI signaling.
  • the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through RRC signaling.
  • the terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  • the terminal may send the second indication information through MAC CE signaling.
  • MAC CE signaling is carried through the PDSCH channel, and the terminal can indicate whether the configuration is complete through ACK/NACK.
  • the terminal may perform various configurations on the first indication information carried in the RRC signaling. After the terminal configuration is completed, the configuration of the first indication information carried in the RRC signaling may be sent to the first network device.
  • the "RRCReconfiguration Complete" signaling defined in the existing TS36.331 standard is the signaling that the terminal needs to send to the first network device.
  • 205 is not a necessary step.
  • the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through DIC signaling, it is equivalent to instructing the terminal to enter the energy-saving working mode. At this time, the terminal does not need to send the second indication information to the second network device.
  • the first network device sends third indication information to the second network device.
  • the first network device may send third indication information for indicating that the configuration of the terminal is complete to the second network device.
  • the terminal may not be able to complete the configuration due to some reasons, and when the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode, the measurement of the second network device by the terminal is inaccurate and cannot be synchronized with the second network device (for example, dual The configuration information in the connection working mode measures the second network device).
  • the terminal changes from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, the terminal cannot quickly enter the dual-connection mode because the signal is not synchronized with the second network device, which affects the information transmission rate between the terminal and the network device.
  • the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
  • the second network device enters an energy-saving working mode.
  • the second network device After the second network device receives the request sent by the first network device, the second network device can directly enter the energy-saving working mode if it is determined that it can enter the energy-saving mode. In other words, the second network device may not need to enter the energy-saving working mode after receiving the third instruction information. Alternatively, the second network device may send response information to the first network device and receive third indication information from the first network device after entering the energy-saving working mode. At this time, the sequence of the above steps can be: 201-202-207-203-204-205.
  • 206 is not a necessary step.
  • the first network device may not need to send the third indication information to the second network device.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the operations in FIG. 2 Deformation of the operation.
  • the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include steps 301-307.
  • Step 301 The second network device determines whether the triggering condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied.
  • the trigger condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include one or more of the following:
  • the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold; the first network device and the first network device 2.
  • the load or resource utilization of the network device is lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than the fourth preset threshold, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold .
  • the second network device When detecting that the trigger condition for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied, the second network device sends to the first network device a working mode conversion request for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode.
  • the request to enter the energy-saving working mode may carry at least one of the following information: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; the second network device used for radio resource management RRM measurement in the energy-saving working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the energy-saving working mode.
  • the first network device sends response information for entering the energy-saving working mode to the second network device.
  • the first network device may determine whether to allow the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode according to its current state. Thereby, a response message of accepting entering the energy-saving working mode or refusing to enter the energy-saving working mode can be sent to the first network device.
  • the response information can take a 1-bit value.
  • the first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
  • the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal connected to the second network device.
  • the first indication information For the specific content of the first indication information, reference may be made to the content of the first indication information shown in 204, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
  • the first network device sends third indication information to the second network device.
  • the second network enters an energy-saving working mode.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is that the second network device determines whether the trigger condition for switching from the dual connection mode to the energy saving mode is satisfied. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from an energy-saving working mode to a dual-connection working mode according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the conversion method from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode may include steps 401-407.
  • the first network device determines whether the triggering condition for the transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode is satisfied.
  • the trigger condition for the transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode may include one or more of the following:
  • the load or resource utilization of the first network device is higher than the preset threshold; the data transmission rate requested by the terminal is higher than the data transmission rate of the first network device; the energy consumption of the first network is greater than the preset threshold , And in the dual-connection working mode, the sum of the energy consumption of the first network device and the second network device is less than the energy consumption of the first network.
  • the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the resources in the above resource utilization rate may include, but are not limited to, frequency domain resource utilization rate, time domain resource utilization rate, etc. as examples.
  • the resource utilization rate of the first network device is higher than the preset threshold, it indicates that the data transmission volume of the terminal exceeds the load volume of the first network device, and the data transmission with the terminal cannot be undertaken by the first network device alone. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the current maximum data transmission rate between the first network device and the terminal is 100 Mbit/s.
  • the data transmission rate requested by the terminal is 200 Mbit/s.
  • the load of the first network device is not higher than the preset threshold at this time, the maximum data transmission rate of the first network device is less than the data transmission rate requested by the terminal.
  • the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the first network device can estimate the energy consumption of the network device according to the load of the network device.
  • the first network device estimates that its own power consumption is greater than the preset threshold, but after the second network device enters the dual-connection mode, the first network device transfers part of the load to the second network device.
  • the first network device When the total power consumption of the device and the second network device is less than the current power consumption of the first network device, the second network device may also be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the first network device When the first network device detects that the triggering condition for switching from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode is met, it sends a working mode conversion request from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode to the second network device.
  • the first network device when detecting that at least one trigger condition shown in 401 is satisfied, may send a request to enter the dual-connection working mode to the first network device.
  • the first network device may send bit stream data to the second network device, directly instructing the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the first network device may use a bitmap to send a request to the second network device, and at the same time use a bit to inquire whether the second network device can enter the dual connection mode.
  • the first network device when it sends a request for entering the dual connection mode to the second network device, it may further include configuration parameters that need to be returned by the second network device.
  • the second network device When the second network device enters the dual-connection working mode, various parameters need to be reconfigured so that the terminal can quickly access the second network device.
  • the configuration parameters that the first network device may request the second network device to return include but are not limited to at least one of the following: common channel configuration information for the second network device in the dual-connection working mode; and the second network device in the dual-connection working mode
  • the configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH is downloaded; the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the dual connection working mode; the configuration information of the second network device used for radio resource management RRM measurement in the dual connection working mode.
  • the configuration parameters can be requested in the form of bitmaps, one of which can represent a configuration parameter inquired.
  • the second network device sends a response message for entering the dual-connection working mode to the first network device.
  • the second network device may send a response message to the first network device to accept to enter the dual-connection working mode or to refuse to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the response information can take a 1-bit value. Specifically, when the bit value is "1", it can indicate that the entry into the working mode is accepted; when the bit value is "0", it can indicate that it is refused to enter the dual-connection working mode.
  • the bit stream may also be used to indicate the reason value of the refusal.
  • the response information of the second network device may include at least one of the following: configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the dual connectivity operating mode; second The network device shares channel configuration information in the dual connection working mode; the second network device uses configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement in the connection working mode.
  • the first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
  • the second network device When the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode, some or all of the carriers in the second network device work in a deactivated state.
  • the carrier of the second network device needs to be activated, so that the carriers work in the activated state.
  • the first network device may record the ID of the terminal connected to the second network device. Therefore, the terminal ID can be used to inform which terminals are converted from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode.
  • the first indication information may include the terminal ID, the SCG index of the second network device, and the carrier index.
  • the SCG index is used to indicate which SCG enters the active state
  • the carrier index is used to indicate which carriers in the SCG enter the active state.
  • both the SCG index and the carrier index can be set in a bitmap manner.
  • the first network device can learn from the response information received by the second network device that the configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and whether the common channel period occurs when the energy-saving working mode is switched to the dual-connection working mode change.
  • the first indication information also needs to include the configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and the common channel period.
  • the terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  • 405 is not a necessary step.
  • the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through DIC signaling, it is equivalent to instructing the terminal to enter the dual-connection working mode. At this time, the terminal does not need to send the second indication information to the second network device.
  • the terminal sends a random access request to the second network device.
  • the terminal may configure various parameters based on the first indication information. Therefore, after the terminal finishes configuring each parameter, it can send a random access request to the second network device.
  • the second network device determines that the random access of the terminal succeeds, and enters the dual-connection working mode.
  • the second network device determines that the terminal has successfully accessed randomly, it can be determined to enter the dual-connection working mode. At this time, data transmission can be carried out with the terminal.
  • FIG. 4 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the steps in FIG. 4 Deformation of the operation.
  • the various steps in FIG. 4 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 4, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 4 are to be performed.
  • the terminal may directly send the random access request to the second network device without sending the second indication information to the first network device.
  • 405 is not a necessary step.
  • the second network device needs to exchange configuration information such as public information and RRM measurement with the first network device and the terminal.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a parameter pre-configuration method of an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second network device Before entering the energy-saving operating mode for the first time, the second network device may pre-configure the parameters of the energy-saving operating mode. Therefore, during the subsequent mode conversion project, the second network device does not need to exchange configuration information such as RRM measurement with the first network device every time, thereby further reducing signaling overhead.
  • the parameter pre-configuration method of the energy-saving working mode is described in detail.
  • the second network device sends configuration information in an energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
  • the configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode may include one or more sets of configuration parameters.
  • Each group of configuration parameters includes the configuration identifier corresponding to the group of configuration parameters, which may also be referred to as a configuration index.
  • Each set of configuration parameters also includes at least one of the following: common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement.
  • each set of configuration parameters is different. That is to say, the common channel configuration information of configuration identifier 1, the configuration information of RRM measurement, and the configuration information of CSI measurement are different from the common channel configuration information of configuration identifier 2, the configuration information of RRM measurement, and the configuration information of CSI measurement.
  • the longer the RRM measurement period and the common channel transmission period are configured in the configuration parameters the greater the energy-saving gain. Therefore, when the second network setting enters the energy-saving working mode, a group of configuration parameters with the longest adoption period can be selected from the foregoing multiple groups of configuration parameters.
  • the terminal cannot maintain synchronization with the second network device or the terminal cannot perform measurement on the second network device within a certain period of time due to the excessively long RRM measurement period and the common channel transmission period.
  • the terminal usually triggers a request to delete the second network device.
  • the second network device can re-select a set of configuration parameters and send it to the first network device, so that the first network device can send the new configuration parameters to the terminal.
  • the second network device needs to send each set of configuration parameters when pre-configuring the energy-saving working mode To the first network device.
  • the first network device sends the configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode to the terminal.
  • the first network device After the first network device receives the configuration information in the energy-saving working mode sent by the second network device, it can send the configuration information to the terminal, so that the terminal can set different configuration parameters for different configuration parameters when the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode. Configure it.
  • the first network device may send pre-configuration information through RRC signaling; or, the first network device may send pre-configuration information through MAC CE signaling; or, the first network device may send pre-configuration information through DCI signaling .
  • the first network device may also send response information to the second network device.
  • the second network device can determine whether the first network device has received the configuration of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode.
  • one bit can be used to indicate whether to accept the configuration request of the second network device, and multiple bits can also be used when instructing to reject the configuration request of the second network device. Value indicating the reason for rejection.
  • the terminal may perform configuration based on the configuration information.
  • the instruction information indicating that the configuration is completed can be sent to the first network device.
  • the terminal may send information for indicating that the configuration is complete to the first network device through RRC signaling.
  • the terminal may send information for indicating that the configuration is complete to the first network device through MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal may not need to send the configuration completion indication information to the first network device.
  • the conversion steps from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 2.
  • the difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
  • the first network device when the first network device sends a request to the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, it can be carried for querying the second network device
  • the configuration identifier of the configuration parameter used in the energy-saving working mode since the previous configuration parameters have been configured for common channel configuration information, RRM measurement configuration information, CSI measurement configuration information, etc., the first network device does not need to inquire about common channel configuration information, RRM measurement, etc.
  • the configuration information of CSI the configuration information of CSI measurement and other parameters, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the response message sent by the second network device to the first network device not only indicates whether it can enter the energy-saving working mode, but also includes the configuration identifier of the configuration parameters used when entering the energy-saving working mode.
  • the second network device may use a bitmap to indicate the configuration identifier of the adopted configuration parameter. Assuming that the second network device is pre-configured with 5 sets of configuration parameters, a 5-bit bitmap can be used to indicate, the first bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 1, the second bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 2, and the third bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 3. The fourth digit is used to indicate configuration identification 4, and the fifth digit is used to indicate configuration identification 5.
  • the bitmap can be set to "01000", thereby indicating that the configuration identifier 2 is used for the configuration parameter.
  • the first indication information used to instruct to enter the energy-saving working mode sent by the first network device to the terminal includes in addition to indicating that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode.
  • the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG and the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the energy-saving operating mode it also includes one or more of the status information used to instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving operating mode
  • the configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter used at the time.
  • the conversion steps from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 3.
  • the difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
  • the second network device when the second network device sends a request to the first network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, it can also carry the second network device in the energy-saving mode.
  • the configuration identifier of the configuration parameter used in the working mode when the second network device sends a request to the first network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, it can also carry the second network device in the energy-saving mode.
  • the first indication information in the first indication information sent by the first network device to the terminal for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode, includes in addition to indicating that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode.
  • the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG and the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the energy-saving operating mode it also includes one or more of the status information used to instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving operating mode
  • the configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter used at the time.
  • the conversion steps from the energy-saving operating mode to the dual-connection operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 4.
  • the difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
  • the first network device when the first network device sends a request to the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode, it can be carried to query the second network device.
  • the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal can agree on the configuration parameters in the dual-connection working mode.
  • the Parameters such as common channel configuration information, RRM measurement configuration information, CSI measurement configuration information and other parameters are reset, that is, the configuration parameters in the dual-connection working mode are considered to be adopted, so that the first network device can no longer inquire about the dual-connection working mode Under the configuration parameters, reduce signaling expenses.
  • the response message sent by the second network device to the first network device not only indicates whether the dual connection working mode can be entered, but also includes the configuration identifier to be cancelled.
  • the second network device may use a bitmap to indicate the configuration identifier corresponding to the cancelled configuration parameter. Assuming that the second network device is pre-configured with 5 sets of configuration parameters, when the second network device adopts the configuration parameters corresponding to configuration identification 2 in the energy-saving working state, the bitmap can be set to "00000", thereby instructing to cancel the configuration identification 2 correspondence Configuration parameters.
  • the first indication information used to instruct to enter the energy-saving working mode sent by the first network device to the terminal in addition to the first indication information used to indicate that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode
  • the first indication information in addition to the first indication information used to indicate that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode
  • it also includes one or more of the status information used to indicate the second network device to enter dual-connection operation
  • the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered as going beyond the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application can divide functional units of the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal according to the above method examples.
  • each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be divided.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 5 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of a communication device involved in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 500 may exist in the form of software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. .
  • Fig. 5 shows a possible schematic block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 500 includes: a processing unit 502 and a communication unit 503.
  • the processing unit 502 is used to control and manage the actions of the device.
  • the communication unit 503 is used to support communication between the device and other devices.
  • the device may also include a storage unit 501 for storing program codes and data of the device.
  • the apparatus 600 shown in FIG. 6 may be the first network device and the second network device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 602 can support the device 600 to perform the actions completed by the first network device in the foregoing method examples.
  • the processing unit 602 supports the device 600 to perform, for example, the actions shown in FIG. It is determined whether 201 meets the trigger condition action of the working mode transition, the determination 401 in FIG. 4 meets the trigger condition action of transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the communication unit 603 can support communication between the device 600 and the second network device, terminal, etc., for example, the communication unit 603 supports the device 600 to perform steps 202, 203, 204, and 205 in FIG. 2 and steps 302 and 303 in FIG. 3 , 304, 305, 306, step 402, step 403, step 404, step 405 in FIG. 4, step 501, step 502 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
  • the processing unit 602 can support the apparatus 600 to perform the actions completed by the second network device in the above-mentioned method examples.
  • the processing unit 602 supports the apparatus 600 to perform the processing in FIG. 2 Switching request in 202, work mode entry confirmation in generation 207, trigger condition confirmation in generation 301 in Figure 3, response information in processing 303, and work mode entry confirmation in generation 307, in process 402 in Figure 4
  • the communication unit 603 can support communication between the device 600 and the first network device, terminal, etc., for example, the communication unit 603 supports the device 600 to perform steps 202, 203, and 206 in FIG. 2 and steps 302, 303, and 306 in FIG. 3 , Steps 402, 403, 406 in FIG. 4, step 501 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
  • the processing unit 602 may be a processor or a controller, such as a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), or an application specific integrated circuit (application integrated circuit). -specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, units, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor may also be a combination for realizing computing functions, for example, including a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • the communication unit 603 may be a communication interface, and the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include one or more interfaces.
  • the storage unit 601 may be a memory.
  • the processing unit 602 is a processor
  • the communication unit 603 is a communication interface
  • the storage unit 601 is a memory
  • the device 600 involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the communication device 700 shown in FIG. 6.
  • the device 700 includes: a processor 702 and a communication interface 703. Further, the device 700 may further include a memory 701. Optionally, the apparatus 700 may further include a bus 704. Among them, the communication interface 703, the processor 702, and the memory 701 can be connected to each other through a bus 704; the bus 704 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) Bus and so on.
  • the bus 704 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 7, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 702 may execute various functions of the apparatus 700 by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701.
  • the communication apparatus 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be the first network device and the second network device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 702 may execute the actions performed by the first network device in the foregoing method examples by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701.
  • the processor 702 may execute the actions performed by the second network device in the foregoing method examples by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701.
  • FIG. 8 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of another device involved in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 800 may exist in the form of software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. .
  • FIG. 8 shows a possible schematic block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 800 includes a processing unit 802 and a communication unit 803.
  • the processing unit 802 is used to control and manage the actions of the device.
  • the communication unit 803 is used to support communication between the device and other devices.
  • the device may also include a storage unit 801 for storing program codes and data of the device.
  • the communication device 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be a terminal device or a chip applied to a terminal device.
  • the processing unit 802 can support the device 800 to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned method examples.
  • the processing unit 802 supports the device 800 to perform, for example, the action of the first indication information in the processing 204 in FIG. 2, and the processing in FIG. 3
  • the communication unit 803 can support the communication between the device 800 and the first network device and the second network device, etc., for example, the communication unit 803 supports the device 800 to perform steps 204 and 205 in FIG. 2 and steps 304 and 305 in FIG. 3, Steps 404, 405, and 406 in FIG. 4, step 502 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
  • the processing unit 802 may be a processor or a controller, such as a CPU, a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, units, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor may also be a combination for realizing computing functions, for example, including a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • the communication unit 803 may be a communication interface, and the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include one or more interfaces.
  • the storage unit 801 may be a memory.
  • the apparatus 800 involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 9 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of a terminal device involved in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 900 includes a transmitter 901, a receiver 902, and a processor 903.
  • the processor 903 may also be a controller, which is represented as "controller/processor 903" in FIG. 9.
  • the terminal device 900 may further include a modem processor 905, where the modem processor 905 may include an encoder 906, a modulator 907, a decoder 908, and a demodulator 909.
  • the transmitter 901 adjusts (for example, analog conversion, filtering, amplification, and upconversion, etc.) the output samples and generates an uplink signal, which is transmitted to the base station described in the above-mentioned embodiment via an antenna.
  • the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the base station in the above embodiment.
  • the receiver 902 adjusts (eg, filters, amplifies, downconverts, and digitizes, etc.) the signal received from the antenna and provides input samples.
  • the encoder 906 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages (for example, formatting, encoding, and interleaving).
  • the modulator 907 further processes (for example, symbol mapping and modulation) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples.
  • the demodulator 909 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates.
  • the decoder 908 processes (eg, deinterleaves and decodes) the symbol estimation and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device 900.
  • the encoder 906, the modulator 907, the demodulator 909, and the decoder 908 may be implemented by a synthesized modem processor 905. These units are processed according to the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (for example, LTE, 5G and other access technologies of the evolved system). It should be noted that when the terminal device 900 does not include the modem processor 905, the foregoing functions of the modem processor 905 may also be performed by the processor 903.
  • the processor 903 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device 900, and is configured to execute the processing procedure performed by the terminal device 900 in the foregoing embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 903 is further configured to execute the processing procedure of the terminal device in the method shown in 3 and FIG. 4 and/or other procedures of the technical solution described in this application.
  • the terminal device 900 may further include a memory 904, and the memory 904 is configured to store program codes and data for the terminal device 900.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in combination with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), and erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
  • EPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
  • registers hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium may be located in the ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in the control plane entity of the centralized unit, the user plane entity of the centralized unit, terminal equipment or unified data storage network element.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the control plane entity of the centralized unit, the user plane entity of the centralized unit, terminal equipment, or unified data storage network element.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which can be applied to a communication device, the chip includes at least one processor, and when the at least one processor executes an instruction, the chip or the communication device executes the method provided in the embodiment.
  • the chip may also include a memory, and the memory may be used to store related instructions.
  • the processor mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention may be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), or may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processors, DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits (Central Processing Unit, CPU).
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • DSPs Digital Signal Processors
  • CPU Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be implemented in this application.
  • the implementation process of the example constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices, which are applied to a first network device. The method comprises: determining whether a trigger condition for working mode conversion is satisfied; in response to satisfying the trigger condition for working mode conversion, sending a working mode conversion request to a second network device; and sending, to a terminal connected to the second network device, first indication information used for indicating the working mode conversion. The working modes comprise: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode and the second working mode is an energy-saving working mode. In the described method, when the second network device enters one of the working modes, stored configuration parameters of the terminal do not need to be deleted; and when entering the other working mode, the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the second working mode is changed to the first working mode is reduced, which in turn helps to increase the data transmission rate between the terminal and the network devices.

Description

双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法和装置Working mode conversion method and device of dual-connection network equipment 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体的,涉及通信领域中双连接网络设备的工作模式转换的方法和装置。This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for switching the working mode of dual-connected network devices in the field of communications.
背景技术Background technique
伴随着科学技术的发展,通信技术得以突飞猛进的提升。无线通信技术经过长期的演化发展,当前无线通信技术中,为了提高信息传输速率,在同一区域范围内,通常部署主网络设备和辅网络设备,终端设备可以支持同时接入至主网络设备和辅网络设备中,从而可以同时与主网络设备和辅网络设备进行数据传输。通信数据量的随机性导致网络设备的负载量的随机性。当通信数据量较小时,采用主网络设备即可满足数据传输速率。由于网络设备具有较大的静态功耗(也即网络设备空载运行时的内部能量损耗,例如功率放大器、中频、射频等模块的运行功率损耗),为了降低辅网络设备的功耗,通常需要关闭辅网络设备的某些硬件模块。With the development of science and technology, communication technology has been improved by leaps and bounds. Wireless communication technology has undergone long-term evolution and development. In the current wireless communication technology, in order to increase the information transmission rate, the main network equipment and auxiliary network equipment are usually deployed in the same area. The terminal equipment can support simultaneous access to the main network equipment and the auxiliary network equipment. In the network equipment, data can be transmitted with the main network equipment and the auxiliary network equipment at the same time. The randomness of the amount of communication data leads to the randomness of the load of the network equipment. When the communication data volume is small, the main network equipment can meet the data transmission rate. Since network equipment has large static power consumption (that is, the internal energy loss when the network equipment is running at no load, such as the operating power loss of power amplifiers, intermediate frequency, radio frequency and other modules), in order to reduce the power consumption of auxiliary network equipment, it is usually necessary Turn off some hardware modules of the auxiliary network device.
相关技术中,当辅网络设备的负载量小于预设阈值时,关闭辅网络设备以降低辅网络设备功耗;当主网络设备负载量大于预设阈值或者有高传输速率需求的移动设备接入时,需要重新启动辅网络设备。由于数据传输量的随机性使得主、辅网络设备的负载量过高或过低,可能导致对辅网络设备的反复关闭操作。而每次关闭或启动辅网络设备时,需要终端对要接入的辅网络设备各参数重新配置,导致数据传输时延。这样一来,一方面减少辅网络设备的关闭时间,降低用户体验;另一方面,当时延过大时,即便开启双连接也无法满足时延需求,浪费辅网络设备能量。其次,在关闭辅网络设备后,终端无法检测到辅网络设备信息。待开启双连接时,为了获取最佳匹配的辅网络设备,终端设备需要二次接入(也即重新搜索辅网络设备的同步信息、重新读取系统消息、重新进行区域测量和上报等),严重导致数据时延;为了避免终端设备二次接入,主网络设备随机添加辅网络设备,这就导致主网络设备所添加的辅网络设备不能满足较高的数据传输速度,同样影响数据传输速率。In the related art, when the load of the auxiliary network device is less than a preset threshold, the auxiliary network device is turned off to reduce the power consumption of the auxiliary network device; when the load of the main network device is greater than the preset threshold or a mobile device that requires a high transmission rate is connected , The auxiliary network device needs to be restarted. Due to the randomness of the data transmission volume, the load of the primary and secondary network equipment is too high or too low, which may cause repeated shutdown operations on the secondary network equipment. Each time the auxiliary network device is shut down or started, the terminal needs to reconfigure the parameters of the auxiliary network device to be accessed, resulting in data transmission delay. In this way, on the one hand, the shutdown time of the auxiliary network equipment is reduced and the user experience is reduced; on the other hand, when the delay is too large at that time, even if the dual connection is turned on, the delay requirement cannot be met, and the auxiliary network equipment energy is wasted. Secondly, after closing the auxiliary network device, the terminal cannot detect the auxiliary network device information. When the dual connection is to be turned on, in order to obtain the best matching auxiliary network device, the terminal device needs to be connected twice (that is, re-search for the synchronization information of the auxiliary network device, re-read the system message, re-measure and report the area, etc.), Severely cause data delay; in order to avoid secondary access of terminal equipment, the main network equipment randomly adds auxiliary network equipment, which causes the auxiliary network equipment added by the main network equipment to not meet the higher data transmission speed, and also affects the data transmission rate .
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法和装置,在基站的负荷量较小的情况下由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式,在基站的负荷量较大的情况下,由第二工作模式转换为第一工作模式,在保障基站与终端之间的数据传输速率的情况下,有效降低基站的功耗。The present application provides a method and device for switching the working mode of dual-connection network equipment. When the load of the base station is small, the first working mode is converted to the second working mode. When the load of the base station is large, Switching from the second working mode to the first working mode effectively reduces the power consumption of the base station while ensuring the data transmission rate between the base station and the terminal.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第一网络设备,所述方法包括:确定是否满足工作模式转换的触发条件;响应于满足所述工作模式 转换的触发条件,向第二网络设备发送工作模式转换请求;向与所述第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示所述工作模式转换的第一指示信息;所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能模式,所述第二工作模式为节能模式。In the first aspect, the present application provides a method for switching the operating mode of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to the first network device, and the method includes: determining whether a triggering condition of the operating mode transition is satisfied; and in response to satisfying the operating mode transition Sending a working mode switch request to the second network device; sending first indication information for instructing the working mode switch to the terminal connected to the second network device; the working mode includes: first working Mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving mode, and the second working mode is an energy-saving mode.
由此,本申请所示的工作模式转换包括以下之一:由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式;由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式。Therefore, the working mode conversion shown in the present application includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
本申请的双连接系统中的第一网络设备在确定出满足工作模式转换的触发条件时,向第二网络设备发送工作模式转换请求,以使得第二网络设备进行工作模式转换,从而在负载量低的条件下,使得第二网络设备进入第二工作模式,节省网络设备的功耗,在负载量高的情况下,使得第二网络设备进入第一工作模式,提高数据传输速率。同时,第一网络设备向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送工作模式转换的第一指示信息,以使得终端进行工作模式转换,从而使得在第二工作模式下,终端可以和第二网络设备保持信号同步,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,终端不需要删除第二网络设备的配置参数,有利于在恢复第一工作模式时,终端可以快速接入第二网络设备,降低由第二工作模式转为第一工作模式时终端接入第二网络设备的时延,进而有利于提高终端与网络设备之间的数据传输速率。When the first network device in the dual connection system of the present application determines that the triggering condition of the working mode conversion is satisfied, it sends a working mode conversion request to the second network device, so that the second network device performs the working mode conversion, so that the load Under low conditions, the second network device is made to enter the second working mode, which saves power consumption of the network device, and when the load is high, the second network device is made to enter the first working mode to increase the data transmission rate. At the same time, the first network device sends the first indication information of the work mode switch to the terminal connected to the second network device, so that the terminal performs the work mode switch, so that in the second work mode, the terminal can keep with the second network device. Signal synchronization. When the second network device enters the second working mode, the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial to the terminal to quickly access the second network device when the first working mode is restored, reducing the cost of the second network device. Second, the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to increase the data transmission rate between the terminal and the network device.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。这里,同步信号包括PSS(Primary Synchronization Signal,主同步信号)和SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signal,辅同步信号),PSS和SSS在SSB(Synchronization Signal Block,同步信号块)里传输,与PBCH信道(物理广播信道)一起,配置于固定的时隙位置。MIB(Master Information Block,主系统消息)承载于PBCH信道中发送。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode. Here, the synchronization signal includes PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal). PSS and SSS are transmitted in SSB (Synchronization Signal Block, synchronization signal block), and PBCH channel (physical broadcast) Channel) together, are arranged in fixed time slot positions. MIB (Master Information Block, master system message) is carried on the PBCH channel and sent.
在第二工作模式下,第二网络设备通过以大于第一工作模式下的发送周期发送用于无线资源管理RRM的参考信号(如CSI-RS)、同步信号以及MIB,使得第二网络设备可以在发送信号时开启相关设备、停止发送信号时将相关设备关闭,以达到降低功耗的目的。而在第二工作模式下,终端由于可以周期性的对第二网络设备进行测量,以保障与第二网络设备同步,从而可以不需要删除第二网络设备的配置信息。In the second working mode, the second network device transmits reference signals (such as CSI-RS), synchronization signals, and MIBs for radio resource management RRM with a transmission period greater than that in the first working mode, so that the second network device can Turn on the related equipment when sending a signal, and turn off the related equipment when you stop sending a signal, so as to reduce power consumption. In the second working mode, since the terminal can periodically measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:从所述第二网络设备接收所述工作模式转换请求的响应信息。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving response information of the operating mode conversion request from the second network device.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件,所述由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode The triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
此时,在一种可能的实现方式中,从第二网络设备接收到的响应信息中,可以包括指示当前是否可以进入第二工作模式的指示信息。在某些应用场景中,第二网络设备当前与 终端进行数据传输还未传完,而此时进入节能模式时,通常导致与终端之间的数据传输失败。在该可选的实现方式中,第一网络设备通过接收响应信息,可以判断出第二网络设备当前的工作状态,在确定第二网络设备当前正在进行数据传输时,可以待第二网络设备数据传输完毕后指示第二网络设备进入节能模式,避免数据传输失败。At this time, in a possible implementation manner, the response information received from the second network device may include indication information indicating whether the second working mode can be entered currently. In some application scenarios, the current data transmission between the second network device and the terminal has not been completed, and when it enters the energy-saving mode at this time, the data transmission with the terminal usually fails. In this alternative implementation manner, the first network device can determine the current working status of the second network device by receiving the response information. When it is determined that the second network device is currently performing data transmission, it can wait for the data of the second network device. After the transmission is completed, the second network device is instructed to enter the energy-saving mode to avoid data transmission failure.
此时,上述响应信息还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。At this time, the above-mentioned response information further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
此时,上述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息。At this time, the above-mentioned first indication information includes at least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in the operating mode; used to indicate the configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second operating mode; Configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
在由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的条件下,本申请所示的工作模式转换方法还包括:从所述终端接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;基于接收到的所述第二指示信息,向所述第二网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。通过将指示终端配置完成的第三指示信息发送给第二网络设备,可以使得第二网络设备预留出一定的时间等待终端进行配置,提高终端配置成功率。Under the condition of switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, the working mode switching method shown in this application further includes: receiving second indication information from the terminal, where the second indication information is used to indicate the terminal The configuration is complete; based on the received second indication information, third indication information is sent to the second network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete. By sending the third indication information indicating that the configuration of the terminal is completed to the second network device, the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式的触发条件,所述由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率高于预设门限值;所述终端请求的数据传输速率高于所述第一网络设备的数据传输速率;所述第一网络的能耗大于预设门限值、且在所述第一工作模式下所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的能耗之和小于所述第一网络的能耗。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the trigger condition for the transition of the operating mode includes a trigger condition for transition from the second operating mode to the first operating mode, and the second operating mode is triggered by the second operating mode. The trigger condition for the mode conversion to the first working mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is higher than a preset threshold; the data transmission rate requested by the terminal is high The data transmission rate of the first network device; the energy consumption of the first network is greater than a preset threshold, and the first network device and the second network device in the first working mode The sum of energy consumption is less than the energy consumption of the first network.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
此时,在一种可能的实现方式中,从第二网络设备接收到的响应信息中,可以包括指示当前是否可以进入第一工作模式的指示信息。在某些应用场景中,第二网络设备当前由于配置信息出错或者其他原因而无法进行第一工作模式时,第一网络设备通过接收响应信息,可以判断出第二网络设备当前的工作状态,在确定第二网络设备当前无法进入第一工作模式时,可以待第二网络设备更新后指示第二网络设备进入节能模式,避免终端无法接入第二网络设备、或者接入第二网络设备后无法与第二网络设备进行数据传输,从而提高数据传输效率。At this time, in a possible implementation manner, the response information received from the second network device may include indication information indicating whether it is currently possible to enter the first working mode. In some application scenarios, when the second network device is currently unable to perform the first working mode due to configuration information errors or other reasons, the first network device can determine the current working status of the second network device by receiving the response information. When it is determined that the second network device cannot enter the first working mode currently, the second network device can be instructed to enter the energy-saving mode after the second network device is updated, so as to prevent the terminal from being unable to access the second network device or failing to access the second network device. Perform data transmission with the second network device, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
此时,上述响应信息还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。At this time, the above response information further includes at least one of the following: the configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode; and the second network device in the first working mode Common channel configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
此时,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述 第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。At this time, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in an operating mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate in the first operating mode Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement; used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
结合第一方面,在由第二工作模式转换为第一工作模式的条件下,本申请所示的工作模式转换方法还包括:从所述终端接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。With reference to the first aspect, under the condition that the second working mode is converted to the first working mode, the working mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving second indication information from the terminal, and the second indication information is used At indicating that the terminal configuration is complete.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一次由第一工作模式进入第二工作模式时,可以对第二工作模式下第二网络设备的参数预先配置。该预配置参数的方法包括:从所述第二网络设备接收所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;将所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息发送至所述终端;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;所述第一指示信息包括:所述配置标识。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when entering the second operating mode from the first operating mode for the first time, the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured. The method for pre-configuring parameters includes: receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the second network device; setting the second network device in the second working mode The configuration information is sent to the terminal; the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include the configuration Identify one or more of corresponding common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
本申请通过对第一工作模式的参数预先配置,可以使得在工作模式转换的过程中,不需要每次都对第二工作模式或者第一工作模式下诸如RRM测量的信息、公共信道信息等信息进行重新配置,也即减少了第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间、第一网络设备与终端之间每次信息交互的数目,有利于减少信令开支。In this application, by pre-configuring the parameters of the first working mode, it is not necessary to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time during the working mode conversion process. The reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
结合第一方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,第一网络设备可以从所述第二网络设备接收进入第二工作模式的响应信息,该响应信息包括配置标识。With reference to the first aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the first network device can receive from the second network device to enter the second working mode. The response information of the mode, the response information includes the configuration identifier.
结合第一方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。With reference to the first aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: The state information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the second working mode.
结合第一方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第一工作模式时,第一网络设备可以从所述第二网络设备接收进入第一工作模式的响应信息,该响应信息包括第二工作模式下的配置标识。With reference to the first aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the first working mode, the first network device can receive from the second network device to enter the first working mode. Mode response information, where the response information includes the configuration identifier in the second working mode.
结合第一方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第一工作模式时,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。With reference to the first aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the first working mode, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: Information about the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the first operating mode.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第一网络设备,该方法包括:从第二网络设备接收工作模式转换请求;基于所述工作模式转换请求,向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示工作模式转换的第一指示信息,所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。In a second aspect, the present application provides a method for switching the working mode of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a first network device, and the method includes: receiving a working mode switching request from a second network device; and based on the working mode switching request, Sending first indication information for instructing a work mode transition to a terminal connected to a second network device, the work mode including: a first work mode and a second work mode, wherein the first work mode is non-energy-saving work Mode, the second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
由此,该工作模式转换包括以下之一:由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式;由所述 第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式。Therefore, the work mode conversion includes one of the following: conversion from the first work mode to the second work mode; and conversion from the second work mode to the first work mode.
与第一方面所示的工作模式转换方法不同的是,第二方面所示的工作模式转换可以由第二网络设备发起。也即第二网络设备在确定满足工作模式转换条件之后,即可向第一网络设备发送工作模式转换请求。从而,可以由第一网络设备和第二网络设备同时监控双连接系统的功耗,提高监控效果,有利于降低双连接系统功耗。Different from the working mode conversion method shown in the first aspect, the working mode conversion shown in the second aspect can be initiated by the second network device. That is, after determining that the working mode conversion condition is satisfied, the second network device can send the working mode conversion request to the first network device. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。在该可能实现方式中,在第二工作模式下,第二网络设备在发送信号时开启相关设备、停止发送信号时将相关设备关闭,以达到降低功耗的目的。而终端由于可对第二网络设备进行测量,以保障与第二网络设备同步,从而可以不需要删除第二网络设备的配置信息。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode. In this possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件,所述由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode The triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
此时,从第二网络设备接收的工作模式转换请求还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。At this time, the working mode switch request received from the second network device further includes at least one of the following: the second network device is in the second working mode, the common channel configuration information; the second network device is in the second working mode Configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
此时,上述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息。At this time, the above-mentioned first indication information includes at least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; State information of the carrier of the second network device in the operating mode; used to indicate the configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second operating mode; Configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode; used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
结合第二方面,在由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的条件下,在一种可能的实现方式中,本申请所示的工作模式转换方法还包括:从所述终端接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;基于接收到的所述第二指示信息,向所述第二网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。通过将指示终端配置完成的第三指示信息发送给第二网络设备,可以使得第二网络设备预留出一定的时间等待终端进行配置,提高终端配置成功率。With reference to the second aspect, under the condition of switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode switching method shown in this application further includes: receiving a second instruction from the terminal Information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete; based on the received second indication information, third indication information is sent to the second network device, and the third indication information is used to indicate The terminal configuration is complete. By sending the third indication information indicating that the configuration of the terminal is completed to the second network device, the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
这里值得注意的是,在某些应用场景中,为了可以快速进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备并不需要在接收到第三指示信息之后再进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备可以在接收到第一网络设备的响应信息后,直接进入第二工作模式。It is worth noting here that in some application scenarios, in order to quickly enter the second working mode, the second network device does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information. The second network device can After receiving the response information of the first network device, it directly enters the second working mode.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一次由第一工作模式进入第二工作模 式时,可以对第二工作模式下第二网络设备的参数预先配置。该预配置参数的方法包括:从所述第二网络设备接收所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;将所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息发送至所述终端;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;所述第一指示信息包括:所述配置标识。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when entering the second operating mode from the first operating mode for the first time, the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured. The method for pre-configuring parameters includes: receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the second network device; setting the second network device in the second working mode The configuration information is sent to the terminal; the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include the configuration Identify one or more of corresponding common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
本申请通过对第一工作模式的参数预先配置,可以使得在工作模式转换的过程中,不需要每次都对第二工作模式或者第一工作模式下诸如RRM测量的信息、公共信道信息等信息进行重新配置,也即减少了第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间、第一网络设备与终端之间每次信息交互的数目,有利于减少信令开支。In this application, by pre-configuring the parameters of the first working mode, it is not necessary to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time during the working mode conversion process. The reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
结合第二方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,从第二网络设备接收的工作模式转换请求还包括配置标识。With reference to the second aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been preconfigured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the working mode conversion request received from the second network device further includes a configuration identifier.
结合第二方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。With reference to the second aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the first indication information further includes at least one of the following: The state information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the second working mode.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第二网络设备,该方法包括:从第一网络设备接收工作模式转换请求;基于所述工作模式转换请求,向所述第一网络设备发送所述工作模式转换请求的响应信息;所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。In a third aspect, the present application provides a method for switching the working mode of a dual-connection network device, applied to a second network device, and the method includes: receiving a working mode switching request from the first network device; based on the working mode switching request, Sending response information of the working mode conversion request to the first network device; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and The second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
由此,所述工作模式转换包括以下之一:由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式;由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式。Therefore, the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
本申请的双连接系统中,第二网络设备可以从第一网络设备接收工作模式转换请求,以进行工作模式转换,从而在负载量低的条件下,使得第二网络设备进入第二工作模式,节省网络设备的功耗,在负载量高的情况下,使得第二网络设备进入第一工作模式,提高数据传输速率。同时,第二网络设备在接收到工作模式转换请求后,可以向第一网络设备发送响应信息,以使得第一网络设备可以基于该响应信息向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送第一指示信息,从而使得在第二工作模式下,终端可以和第二网络设备保持信号同步,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,终端不需要删除第二网络设备的配置参数,有利于在恢复第一工作模式时,终端可以快速接入第二网络设备,降低由第二工作模式转为第一工作模式时终端接入第二网络设备的时延,进而有利于提高终端与网络设备之间的数据传输速率。In the dual connection system of the present application, the second network device may receive a working mode switch request from the first network device to perform the working mode switch, so that the second network device enters the second working mode under the condition of low load. The power consumption of the network device is saved, and the second network device enters the first working mode when the load is high, and the data transmission rate is increased. At the same time, the second network device may send response information to the first network device after receiving the working mode switch request, so that the first network device can send the first indication information to the terminal connected to the second network device based on the response information , So that in the second working mode, the terminal can maintain signal synchronization with the second network device. When the second network device enters the second working mode, the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial in restoring the second network device. In the first working mode, the terminal can quickly access the second network device, reducing the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the second working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to improve the communication between the terminal and the network device. Data transfer rate.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。在该可能实现方式中,在第二工作模式下,第二网络设备在发送信号时开启相关设备、停止发送信号时将相关设备关闭,以达到降低功耗的目的。而终端由于可对第二网络设备进行测量,以保障与第二网络设备同步,从而可 以不需要删除第二网络设备的配置信息。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode. In this possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
此时,在一些可能的实现方式中,第二网络设备在接收到工作模式转换请求后,基于自身当前的工作状态,向第一网络设备发送响应信息中,可以包括指示当前是否可以进入第二工作模式的指示信息。在某些应用场景中,第二网络设备当前与终端进行数据传输还未传完,而此时进入节能模式时,导致与终端之间的数据传输失败。通过发送是否可以进入第二工作模式的指示信息,可以使得第一网络设备待第二网络设备数据传输完毕后指示第二网络设备进入节能模式,避免数据传输失败。At this time, in some possible implementations, after the second network device receives the working mode switch request, based on its current working state, the response message sent to the first network device may include an indication of whether the second network device can enter the second network device. Instruction information of working mode. In some application scenarios, the current data transmission between the second network device and the terminal has not been completed, and when it enters the energy-saving mode at this time, the data transmission with the terminal fails. By sending the indication information of whether it is possible to enter the second working mode, the first network device can instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode after the data transmission of the second network device is completed, so as to avoid data transmission failure.
此时,上述响应信息还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。At this time, the above-mentioned response information further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
结合第三方面,在由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的条件下,本申请所示的工作模式转换方法还包括:从所述第一网络设备接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;基于所述第三指示信息,进入所述第二工作模式。通过将指示终端配置完成的第三指示信息发送给第二网络设备,可以使得第二网络设备预留出一定的时间等待终端进行配置,提高终端配置成功率。With reference to the third aspect, under the condition that the first operating mode is converted to the second operating mode, the operating mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving third indication information from the first network device, and the third The indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is completed; based on the third indication information, enter the second working mode. By sending the third indication information indicating that the configuration of the terminal is completed to the second network device, the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
这里值得注意的是,在某些应用场景中,为了可以快速进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备并不需要在接收到第三指示信息之后再进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备可以在接收到第一网络设备发送的由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的请求后,直接进入第二工作模式。It is worth noting here that in some application scenarios, in order to quickly enter the second working mode, the second network device does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information. The second network device can After receiving the request from the first network device to switch from the first working mode to the second working mode, it directly enters the second working mode.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
此时,在一些可能的实现方式中,在由第二工作模式转换为第一工作模式时,第二网络设备在接收到工作模式转换请求后,基于自身当前的工作状态,向第一网络设备发送响应信息中,可以包括指示当前是否可以进入第一工作模式的指示信息。在某些应用场景中,第二网络设备当前由于配置信息出错或者其他原因而无法进行第一工作模式时,通过该指示信息通知第一网络设备,可以使得第一网络设备在确定第二网络设备当前无法进入第一工作模式时,可以待第二网络设备更新后指示第二网络设备进入节能模式,避免终端无法接入第二网络设备、或者接入第二网络设备后无法与第二网络设备进行数据传输,从而提高数据传输效率。At this time, in some possible implementations, when the second operating mode is converted to the first operating mode, after receiving the operating mode transition request, the second network device sends a request to the first network device based on its current operating state. The sending response information may include indication information indicating whether it is currently possible to enter the first working mode. In some application scenarios, when the second network device is currently unable to perform the first working mode due to configuration information errors or other reasons, the first network device is notified through the instruction information, so that the first network device can determine the second network device When the first working mode cannot be entered currently, the second network device can be instructed to enter the energy-saving mode after the second network device is updated, so as to prevent the terminal from being unable to access the second network device or being unable to communicate with the second network device after accessing the second network device. Perform data transmission, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
此时,上述响应信息还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。At this time, the above response information further includes at least one of the following: the configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode; and the second network device in the first working mode Common channel configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
结合第三方面,在由第二工作模式转换为第一工作模式的条件下,本申请所示的由第二网络设备执行的工作模式转换方法还包括:从终端接收随机接入请求;响应于确定所述终端随机接入成功,进入所述第一工作模式。With reference to the third aspect, under the condition that the second operating mode is converted to the first operating mode, the operating mode conversion method performed by the second network device shown in this application further includes: receiving a random access request from the terminal; and responding to It is determined that the random access of the terminal succeeds and enters the first working mode.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一次由第一工作模式进入第二工作模 式时,可以对第二工作模式下第二网络设备的参数预先配置。由第二网络设备执行的预配置参数的方法包括:向所述第一网络设备发送所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;所述响应信息包括:所述配置标识。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when entering the second operating mode from the first operating mode for the first time, the parameters of the second network device in the second operating mode may be pre-configured. The method for pre-configuring parameters performed by a second network device includes: sending configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the first network device; and the second network device is working in the second mode. The configuration information in the mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, and configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement And one or more of the configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the response information includes: the configuration identifier.
本申请通过对第二工作模式的参数预先配置,可以使得在工作模式转换的过程中,不需要每次都对第二工作模式或者第一工作模式下诸如RRM测量的信息、公共信道信息等信息进行重新配置,也即减少了第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间、第一网络设备与终端之间每次信息交互的数目,有利于减少信令开支。This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time. The reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
结合第三方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的响应信息包括配置标识。可选的,响应信息还可以包括用于指示第二网络设备是否可以进入第二工作模式的指示信息。With reference to the third aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been preconfigured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the response information sent by the second network device to the first network device includes the configuration identifier. Optionally, the response information may further include indication information used to indicate whether the second network device can enter the second working mode.
结合第三方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第一工作模式时,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的响应信息包括配置标识。可选的,响应信息还可以包括用于指示第二网络设备是否可以进入第一工作模式的指示信息。With reference to the third aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been preconfigured, when the second network device enters the first working mode, the response information sent by the second network device to the first network device includes the configuration identifier. Optionally, the response information may further include indication information used to indicate whether the second network device can enter the first working mode.
第四方面,本申请提供一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第二网络设备,该方法包括:确定是否满足工作模式转换的触发条件;响应于满足所述工作模式转换的触发条件,向第一网络设备发送工作模式转换请求;所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a second network device, and the method includes: determining whether a trigger condition of a working mode conversion is satisfied; and responding to satisfying the triggering of the working mode conversion Condition, sending a working mode conversion request to the first network device; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and the second working mode is Energy-saving working mode.
由此,该工作模式转换包括以下之一:由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式;由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式。Therefore, the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
与第三方面所示的工作模式转换方法不同的是,第四方面所示的工作模式转换可以由第二网络设备发起。也即第二网络设备在确定满足工作模式转换条件之后,即可向第一网络设备发送工作模式转换请求。从而,可以由第一网络设备和第二网络设备同时监控双连接系统的功耗,提高监控效果,有利于降低双连接系统功耗。Different from the working mode conversion method shown in the third aspect, the working mode conversion shown in the fourth aspect can be initiated by the second network device. That is, after determining that the working mode conversion condition is satisfied, the second network device can send the working mode conversion request to the first network device. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。在该可能实现方式中,在第二工作模式下,第二网络设备在发送信号时开启相关设备、停止发送信号时将相关设备关闭,以达到降低功耗的目的。而终端由于可对第二网络设备进行测量,以保障与第二网络设备同步,从而可以不需要删除第二网络设备的配置信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode. In this possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件,所述由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;所述第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the triggering condition for the switching of the working mode includes a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to the second working mode The triggering condition of the mode includes one or more of the following: the load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than The second preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than The fourth preset threshold value, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold value.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the working mode conversion request includes requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
此时,第二网络设备发送的工作模式转换请求还包括以下至少一项:所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。At this time, the working mode switch request sent by the second network device further includes at least one of the following: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; and the use of the second network device in the second working mode RRM measurement configuration information for radio resource management; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
结合第四方面,在由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的条件下,本申请所示的工作模式转换方法还包括:从所述第一网络设备接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;基于所述第三指示信息,进入所述第二工作模式。通过将指示终端配置完成的第三指示信息发送给第二网络设备,可以使得第二网络设备预留出一定的时间等待终端进行配置,提高终端配置成功率。With reference to the fourth aspect, under the condition that the first working mode is converted to the second working mode, the working mode conversion method shown in this application further includes: receiving third indication information from the first network device, and the third The indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is completed; based on the third indication information, enter the second working mode. By sending the third indication information indicating that the configuration of the terminal is completed to the second network device, the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
这里值得注意的是,在某些应用场景中,为了可以快速进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备并不需要在接收到第三指示信息之后再进入第二工作模式,第二网络设备可以在接收到第一网络设备发送的响应信息后,直接进入第二工作模式。It is worth noting here that in some application scenarios, in order to quickly enter the second working mode, the second network device does not need to enter the second working mode after receiving the third indication information. The second network device can After receiving the response information sent by the first network device, it directly enters the second working mode.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一次由第一工作模式进入第二工作模式时,可以对第二工作模式下第二网络设备的参数预先配置。由第二网络设备执行的预配置参数的方法包括:向所述第一网络设备发送所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;所述响应信息包括:所述配置标识。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when entering the second working mode from the first working mode for the first time, the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode may be pre-configured. The method for pre-configuring parameters performed by a second network device includes: sending configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the first network device; and the second network device is working in the second mode. The configuration information in the mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, and configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement And one or more of the configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement; the response information includes: the configuration identifier.
本申请通过对第二工作模式的参数预先配置,可以使得在工作模式转换的过程中,不需要每次都对第二工作模式或者第一工作模式下诸如RRM测量的信息、公共信道信息等信息进行重新配置,也即减少了第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间、第一网络设备与终端之间每次信息交互的数目,有利于减少信令开支。This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time. The reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
结合第四方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的工作模式转换请求还包括配置标识。With reference to the fourth aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been pre-configured, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the working mode conversion request sent by the second network device to the first network device further includes Configuration identification.
第五方面,本申请提供一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于终端,该方法包括:从第一网络设备接收用于指示第二网络设备的工作模式转换的第一指示信息;基于所述第一指示信息,对接入所述第二网络的参数进行配置;所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device, which is applied to a terminal, and the method includes: receiving, from a first network device, first indication information for instructing a working mode conversion of a second network device; Configure parameters for accessing the second network based on the first indication information; the working mode includes: a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode , The second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
由此,所述工作模式转换包括以下之一:由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式;由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式。Therefore, the working mode conversion includes one of the following: converting from a first working mode to a second working mode; and converting from the second working mode to the first working mode.
终端通过从第一网络设备接收第一指示信息,使得终端可以对第二工作模式下或者第一工作模式下、第二网络设备的参数进行配置,从而使得在第二工作模式下,终端可以和第二网络设备保持信号同步,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,终端不需要删除第二网络设备的配置参数,有利于在恢复第一工作模式时,终端可以快速接入第二网络设备, 降低由第二工作模式转为第一工作模式时终端接入第二网络设备的时延,进而有利于提高终端与网络设备之间的数据传输速率。The terminal receives the first indication information from the first network device, so that the terminal can configure the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode or in the first working mode, so that the terminal can communicate with each other in the second working mode. The second network device maintains signal synchronization. When the second network device enters the second working mode, the terminal does not need to delete the configuration parameters of the second network device, which is beneficial for the terminal to quickly access the second network when the first working mode is restored. The device reduces the time delay for the terminal to access the second network device when the second working mode is changed to the first working mode, thereby helping to increase the data transmission rate between the terminal and the network device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。在该可能实现方式中,在第二工作模式下,第二网络设备在发送信号时开启相关设备、停止发送信号时将相关设备关闭,以达到降低功耗的目的。而终端由于可对第二网络设备进行测量,以保障与第二网络设备同步,从而可以不需要删除第二网络设备的配置信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement for radio resource management The transmission period of the signal is greater than the transmission period in the first working mode. In this possible implementation manner, in the second working mode, the second network device turns on the related device when sending a signal, and turns off the related device when it stops sending a signal, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing power consumption. Since the terminal can measure the second network device to ensure synchronization with the second network device, there is no need to delete the configuration information of the second network device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换包括由所述第一工作模式转换为所述第二工作模式;所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;用于指示所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;用于指示所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the operating mode conversion includes converting from the first operating mode to the second operating mode; the first indication information includes at least one of the following: Indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; used to indicate the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the second operating mode; Configuration information for instructing the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode; configuration information for instructing the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode ; Used to indicate the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述工作模式转换包括由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the work mode conversion includes conversion from the second work mode to the first work mode, and the first indication information includes at least one of the following: Information indicating the state of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the state information of the carrier of the second network device in the first operating mode; For indicating the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode; for indicating the configuration information for the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode; Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:向所述第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending second indication information to the first network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:向所述第二网络设备发送随机接入请求。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending a random access request to the second network device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一次由第一工作模式进入第二工作模式时,可以对第二工作模式下第二网络设备的参数预先配置。由终端执行的预配置参数的方法包括:从所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;所述第一指示信息包括:所述配置标识。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when entering the second working mode from the first working mode for the first time, the parameters of the second network device in the second working mode may be pre-configured. The method for pre-configuring parameters executed by the terminal includes: receiving from the first network device the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode; the second network device in the second working mode The configuration information includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement, and One or more items of configuration information of channel state information CSI measurement; the first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
本申请通过对第二工作模式的参数预先配置,可以使得在工作模式转换的过程中,不需要每次都对第二工作模式或者第一工作模式下诸如RRM测量的信息、公共信道信息等信息进行重新配置,也即减少了第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间、第一网络设备与终端之间每次信息交互的数目,有利于减少信令开支。This application pre-configures the parameters of the second working mode, so that in the process of working mode conversion, there is no need to perform information such as RRM measurement information, common channel information, etc. in the second working mode or the first working mode every time. The reconfiguration also reduces the number of information exchanges between the second network device and the first network device, and between the first network device and the terminal, which is beneficial to reducing signaling expenses.
结合第五方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二网络设备进入第二工作模式时,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项: 用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been preconfigured, in a possible implementation manner, when the second network device enters the second working mode, the first indication information further includes At least one of the following: used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second operating mode; used to indicate the second network device in the second operating mode The status information of the carrier.
结合第五方面,在对第二网络设备的参数已经进行预配置的条件下,在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二网络设备进入第一工作模式时,所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, under the condition that the parameters of the second network device have been preconfigured, in a possible implementation manner, when the second network device enters the first working mode, the first indication information further includes At least one of the following: information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first operating mode; used to indicate the second network device in the first operating mode The status information of the carrier.
这里需要说明的时,上述第一方面至第五方面中所述的第一工作模式可以为双连接工作模式,第二工作模式可以为节能工作模式。第一工作模式、第二工作模式还可以为其他工作模式,在此不做具体限定。It should be noted here that the first working mode described in the first aspect to the fifth aspect may be a dual-connection working mode, and the second working mode may be an energy-saving working mode. The first working mode and the second working mode may also be other working modes, which are not specifically limited here.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,用于执行上述任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。示例性的,该通信装置包括用于执行上述任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, which is configured to execute any of the foregoing aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any aspect. Exemplarily, the communication device includes a unit for executing any one of the foregoing aspects or a method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the aspects.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置包括:处理器和收发器,可选的,该装置还可以包括存储器和总线系统。其中,该收发器、该存储器和该处理器通过该总线系统相连,该存储器用于存储指令,该处理器用于执行指令,比如执行该存储器存储的指令,以控制收发器接收和/或发送信号,并且当该处理器执行指令,比如执行该存储器存储的指令时,该执行使得该处理器或该通信装置执行上述任一方面或任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The device includes a processor and a transceiver. Optionally, the device may further include a memory and a bus system. The transceiver, the memory, and the processor are connected through the bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute instructions, such as executing instructions stored in the memory, to control the transceiver to receive and/or send signals And when the processor executes an instruction, for example, executes an instruction stored in the memory, the execution causes the processor or the communication device to execute any of the foregoing aspects or the method in any possible implementation manner of any aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行上述任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing a method in any possible implementation manner of any of the foregoing aspects.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码被通信设备(例如,终端设备或网络设备)的通信单元、处理单元或收发器、处理器运行时,使得通信设备执行上述任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is used by a communication unit, a processing unit, or a transceiver of a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device) When the processor is running, the communication device is allowed to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of any of the foregoing aspects.
第十方面,提供了一种芯片,该芯片可应用于通信装置,该芯片包括至少一个处理器,当该至少一个处理器执行指令时,使得该芯片或该通信装置执行上述任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,该芯片还可以包括存储器,该存储器可用于存储涉及的指令。In a tenth aspect, a chip is provided. The chip can be applied to a communication device. The chip includes at least one processor. When the at least one processor executes an instruction, the chip or the communication device executes any of the above aspects. For the method in a possible implementation manner, the chip may further include a memory, and the memory may be used to store related instructions.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括上述第一网络设备、第二网络设备和终端。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, including the above-mentioned first network device, second network device, and terminal.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1a示出了应用本申请实施例提供的一个网络架构的示意图;Figure 1a shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图1b示出了本申请实施例提供的部署在不同站点上的主网络设备和辅网络设备以及终端的内部结构示意图;FIG. 1b shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a main network device, a secondary network device, and a terminal that are deployed on different sites according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1c示出了应用本申请实施例提供的又一个网络架构的示意图;FIG. 1c shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图1d示出了本申请实施例提供的部署在同一站点上的主网络设备和辅网络设备以及终端的内部结构示意图;FIG. 1d shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the main network device, the auxiliary network device, and the terminal that are deployed on the same site according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的一种转换方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3示出了本申请实施例提供的由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的又一种转 换方法的示意性流程图;Fig. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4示出了本申请实施例提供的由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的一种转换方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from an energy-saving working mode to a dual-connection working mode according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5示出了本申请实施例提供的一种节能工作模式的参数预配置方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for pre-configuring parameters of an energy-saving working mode according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 6 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 8 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的示意性框图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、新空口(new radio interface,NR)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统以及上述任意结合的系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (LTE) system, new radio interface (NR) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) ) System, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), the future 5th generation (5G) system, and any combination of the foregoing systems, etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality. (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids Wireless terminals in transportation safety (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart city (smart city), wireless terminals in smart home (smart home), cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (session initiation protocol) , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network or terminal devices in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中的网络设备(第一网络设备和第二网络设备)可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备也可以称为接入网设备或无线接入网设备,可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该接入设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的接入设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的接 入设备等,可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point,AP),可以是新型无线系统(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB本申请实施例并不限定。The network equipment (the first network equipment and the second network equipment) in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminal equipment. The network equipment may also be referred to as an access network equipment or a wireless access network equipment, which may be The evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station or an access device. Points, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, and access devices in the future 5G network or access devices in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., can be access points (AP) in WLANs, and can be new wireless systems The gNB in the (new radio, NR) system is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
另外,在本申请实施例中,网络设备(第一网络设备和第二网络设备)还可以是RAN(Radio Access Network,无线接入网)中的设备,或者说,是将终端设备接入到无线网络的RAN节点。例如,作为示例而非限定,作为网络设备,可以列举:gNB、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)等。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the network equipment (the first network equipment and the second network equipment) may also be equipment in the RAN (Radio Access Network, radio access network), or in other words, the terminal equipment is connected to The RAN node of the wireless network. For example, as an example and not a limitation, as a network device, it can include: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC) ), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), Baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wifi) access point (AP), etc.
接入设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与接入设备进行通信,该小区可以是接入设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The access device provides services for the cell, and the terminal device communicates with the access device through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell, and the cell may be corresponding to the access device (for example, a base station) A cell. A cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell. The small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, and micro cell. Femto cells, etc., these small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
此外,LTE系统或5G系统中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作,在某些特殊场景下,也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如在载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景下,当为终端设备配置辅载波时,会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell indentification,Cell ID),在这种情况下,可以认为载波与小区的概念等同,比如终端设备接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。In addition, the carrier in the LTE system or the 5G system can have multiple cells working at the same frequency at the same time. In some special scenarios, the concept of the above-mentioned carrier and the cell can also be regarded as equivalent. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, when a secondary carrier is configured for a terminal device, the carrier index of the secondary carrier and the cell identification (Cell ID) of the secondary cell working on the secondary carrier will be carried at the same time. In this case, it can be considered that the concept of carrier and cell is equivalent, for example, a terminal device accessing a carrier is equivalent to accessing a cell.
请参参考图1a,图1a示出了应用于本申请实施例的一种网络架构的示意图。在图1a中,终端设备可以同时接入到两个网络设备中,该接入方式称为双连接(dual-connectivity,DC)。该两个网络设备之中,负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息,并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互的为第一网络设备,也可称为主网络设备,另一个网络设备为第二网络设备,也可以称为辅网络设备。Please refer to FIG. 1a, which shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied to an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 1a, the terminal device can be connected to two network devices at the same time, and this access method is called dual-connectivity (DC). Among the two network devices, the one that is responsible for interacting with the terminal device for radio resource control messages and for interacting with the core network control plane entity is the first network device, which can also be called the main network device, and the other network device is the second network device. Network equipment can also be called auxiliary network equipment.
类似的,终端设备也可以同时与多个接入设备存在通信连接并可收发数据,可以称之为多连接或者多链接(multi-connectivity,MC),该多个接入设备之中,可以有一个接入设备负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息,并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互,那么,该网络设备可以称之为主网络设备,则其余的网络设备可以称之为辅网络设备。Similarly, the terminal device can also have a communication connection with multiple access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called multi-connectivity or multi-connectivity (multi-connectivity, MC). Among the multiple access devices, there can be An access device is responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device, and is responsible for interacting with the core network control plane entity. Then, the network device can be called the main network device, and the rest of the network devices can be called the auxiliary network device. .
本申请实施例中,第一网络设备和第二网络设备可以为相同无线接入类型的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备和第二网络设备可以为LTE系统的网络设备,或者可以为NR系统的网络设备。主网络设备和辅网络设备还可以是不同无线接入类型的网络设备。例如,主网络设备为LTE系统的网络设备,辅网络设备为NR系统的网络设备;或者,主网络设备为NR系统的网络设备,辅网络设备为LTE系统的网络设备。主网络设备和辅网络设备之间可以通过接口相互通信,从而,主网络设备可以获知辅网络设备的各种信息。该信息例如可以包括但不限于辅网络设备的负荷量、资源利用率等。同样,辅网络设备也可以获知主网络设备的诸如负荷量、资源利用率等信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the first network device and the second network device may be network devices of the same wireless access type. For example, the first network device and the second network device may be network devices of the LTE system, or may be network devices of the NR system. The main network device and the auxiliary network device may also be network devices of different wireless access types. For example, the main network device is a network device of the LTE system, and the auxiliary network device is a network device of the NR system; or, the main network device is a network device of the NR system, and the auxiliary network device is a network device of the LTE system. The main network device and the auxiliary network device can communicate with each other through an interface, so that the main network device can learn various information of the auxiliary network device. The information may include, but is not limited to, the load and resource utilization of the auxiliary network device, for example. Similarly, the auxiliary network device can also learn information such as load and resource utilization of the main network device.
下面简要介绍适用于本申请的3种具体的多无线接入类型双连接(multiple RATs dual  connectivity,MR-DC)架构:The following briefly introduces three specific multiple RATs dual connectivity (MR-DC) architectures applicable to this application:
1)E-UTRA NR DC(简称为EN-DC)架构1) E-UTRA NR DC (referred to as EN-DC) architecture
该架构也可以称为选择(option)3系列。在该架构下,LTE网络设备(比如LTE eNB)作为主网络设备,NR网络设备(比如gNB)作为辅网络设备进行DC,并且核心网设备为EPC。其中,LTE eNB通过S1-C接口或S1-U接口连接到EPC,为终端设备与EPC之间的数据提供空口传输资源。或者,LTE eNB通过S1-C接口或S1-U接口连接到EPC,gNB通过S1-U接口连接到EPC,为终端设备与EPC之间的数据传输提供空口传输资源。This architecture can also be referred to as the option 3 series. Under this architecture, LTE network equipment (such as LTE eNB) is used as the primary network equipment, NR network equipment (such as gNB) is used as the secondary network equipment for DC, and the core network equipment is EPC. Among them, the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and provides air interface transmission resources for data between the terminal device and the EPC. Alternatively, the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and the gNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal equipment and the EPC.
2)NR E-UTRA DC(简称NE-DC)架构2) NR E-UTRA DC (NE-DC for short) architecture
该架构也可以称为option 4系列。在该架构下,NR网络设备(比如gNB)作为主网络设备,LTE网络设备(比如ng eNB)作为辅网络设备进行DC,并且核心网设备为5GC。其中,gNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源;或者,gNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,ng-eNB通过NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。This architecture can also be called option 4 series. Under this architecture, NR network equipment (such as gNB) serves as the primary network equipment, LTE network equipment (such as ng eNB) serves as the secondary network equipment for DC, and the core network equipment is 5GC. Among them, gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC; or gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface, ng-eNB Connect to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
3)下一代E-UTRA NR DC(Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC,简称NG NE-DC)架构3) Next-generation E-UTRA NR DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC, NG NE-DC for short) architecture
该架构也可以称为option 7系列。即LTE网络设备(比如ng-gNB)作为主网络设备,NR网络设备(比如gNB)作为辅网络设备进行DC,并且核心网设备为5GC。其中,ng-eNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源;或者,ng-eNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,gNB通过NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。This architecture can also be called option 7 series. That is, the LTE network equipment (such as ng-gNB) is used as the main network equipment, the NR network equipment (such as gNB) is used as the secondary network equipment for DC, and the core network equipment is 5GC. Among them, ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC; or ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface , GNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备和第二网络设备可以为部署在不同站点上的接入网络设备。在图1a中,示出了第一网络设备和第二网络设备设置于不同站点的情况。此时,每一个网络设备均包括处理器和收发器,以从终端接收各种信号,或者向终端发送信号,并对该信号进行处理。如图1b所示,图1b示出了部署在不同站点上的第一网络设备和第二网络设备以及终端的内部结构示意图。从图1b中可以看出,第一网络设备通过收发器1与终端进行通信;第二网络设备通过收发器2与终端进行通信;终端通过收发器3可以同时与第一网络设备和第二网络设备进行通信。In a possible implementation manner, the first network device and the second network device may be access network devices deployed on different sites. In Fig. 1a, a situation where the first network device and the second network device are set at different sites is shown. At this time, each network device includes a processor and a transceiver to receive various signals from the terminal, or send a signal to the terminal, and process the signal. As shown in Fig. 1b, Fig. 1b shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the first network device, the second network device and the terminal deployed on different sites. It can be seen from Figure 1b that the first network device communicates with the terminal through the transceiver 1; the second network device communicates with the terminal through the transceiver 2; the terminal can communicate with the first network device and the second network at the same time through the transceiver 3. The device communicates.
在另外一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备和第二网络设备还可以为部署在同一站点上的网络设备。如图1c所示,图1c示出了应用于本申请实施例的又一种网络架构的示意图。在图1c中,示出了第一网络设备和第二网络设备设置于相同站点的情况。此时,第一网络设备和第二网络设备可以共用同一收发器与终端通信。如图1d所示,图1d示出了部署在同一站点上的第一网络设备和第二网络设备、以及终端的内部结构示意图。从图1d中可以看出,第一网络设备包括处理器1、第二网络设备包括处理器2。而二者共用收发器3。也即,第一网络设备和第二网络设备均通过收发器3与终端通信。In another possible implementation manner, the first network device and the second network device may also be network devices deployed on the same site. As shown in FIG. 1c, FIG. 1c shows a schematic diagram of yet another network architecture applied to an embodiment of the present application. In Fig. 1c, a situation where the first network device and the second network device are set at the same site is shown. At this time, the first network device and the second network device can share the same transceiver to communicate with the terminal. As shown in FIG. 1d, FIG. 1d shows a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal deployed on the same site. It can be seen from FIG. 1d that the first network device includes a processor 1 and the second network device includes a processor 2. And the two share the transceiver 3. That is, both the first network device and the second network device communicate with the terminal through the transceiver 3.
在图1a-图1d所示的网络设备中,第一网络设备和第二网络设备不是固定的,也即是说,在某些情况下(例如第二网络设备负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息)时,可以将该第二网络设备作为主网络设备,将第一网络设备作为辅网络设备。在此不做具体限定。In the network devices shown in Figures 1a-1d, the first network device and the second network device are not fixed, that is to say, in some cases (for example, the second network device is responsible for interacting with the terminal device wireless resources In the case of the control message), the second network device can be used as the main network device, and the first network device can be used as the auxiliary network device. There is no specific limitation here.
在图1a-图1d所示的网络设备中,辅网络设备可以有两种工作模式,第一工作模式和 第二工作模式。其中,在第一工作模式下,辅网络设备与终端进行通信以及数据传输,此时也称为非节能工作模式。这里,非节能工作模式可以包括多连接工作模式、双连接工作模式等。在第二工作模式下,辅网络设备与终端不进行数据传输,此时也称为节能工作模式。为了对本申请更加清楚的论述,以下各实施例中均将第一工作模式称为双连接工作模式、将第二工作模式称为节能工作模式,以对本申请进行详细阐述。需要说明的是,本申请中的第一工作模式和第二工作模式还可以其他名字命名,只要符合第一工作模式和第二工作模式的工作方式,均落入本申请所示的第一工作模式、第二工作模式范围内。In the network devices shown in Figs. 1a-1d, the auxiliary network device may have two working modes, a first working mode and a second working mode. Among them, in the first working mode, the auxiliary network device communicates with the terminal and transmits data, which is also called a non-energy-saving working mode at this time. Here, the non-energy-saving working mode may include a multi-connection working mode, a dual-connection working mode, and so on. In the second working mode, the auxiliary network device and the terminal do not perform data transmission, which is also called the energy-saving working mode at this time. In order to discuss the application more clearly, in the following embodiments, the first working mode is referred to as a dual-connection working mode, and the second working mode is referred to as an energy-saving working mode, so as to describe the application in detail. It should be noted that the first working mode and the second working mode in this application can also be named with other names. As long as they conform to the working methods of the first working mode and the second working mode, they all fall into the first job shown in this application. Mode, the second working mode range.
在双连接工作模式下,网络设备具有较高的功耗。当网络设备的负载量低,没有必要通过双连接向终端传输数据,仅通过主网络设备足以承担负载量的时候,辅网络设备可能出现空载或负荷量低于预设值的情况。此时,辅网络设备中诸如功率放大器、射频单元等器件仍然存在较大的静态功耗,使得辅网络设备的功耗并不会因为低负载量的降低而降低。如果在辅网络设备空载时关闭上述静态功耗过大的器件,则辅网络设备需要删除与该辅网络设备连接的终端的配置信息;当该辅网络设备开启以使得终端恢复双连接时,辅网络设备需要重新添加接入该辅网络设备的终端的配置信息。这样一来,终端接入辅网络设备以恢复双连接时,时延严重。例如,该时延通常达到百毫秒或更大。在一个具体应用场景中,当用户需要高速网络下载时,由于终端接入辅网络设备的时延严重,从而大大降低了用户的数据下载速度,降低用户体验。In the dual-connection working mode, the network equipment has higher power consumption. When the load of the network device is low, there is no need to transmit data to the terminal through dual connections, and only the main network device is sufficient to bear the load, the auxiliary network device may be empty or the load may be lower than the preset value. At this time, components such as power amplifiers and radio frequency units in the auxiliary network equipment still have relatively large static power consumption, so that the power consumption of the auxiliary network equipment will not be reduced due to the reduction of the low load. If the device with excessive static power consumption is turned off when the auxiliary network device is unloaded, the auxiliary network device needs to delete the configuration information of the terminal connected to the auxiliary network device; when the auxiliary network device is turned on to enable the terminal to resume dual connections, The auxiliary network device needs to re-add the configuration information of the terminal connected to the auxiliary network device. As a result, when the terminal accesses the auxiliary network device to restore the dual connection, the time delay is serious. For example, the delay usually reaches a hundred milliseconds or more. In a specific application scenario, when users need high-speed network downloads, the time delay for the terminal to access the auxiliary network device is severe, which greatly reduces the user's data download speed and reduces the user experience.
在双连接工作模式下,终端可以同时与主网络设备和辅网络设备进行数据传输,以提高终端网络的数据传输速率。在节能工作模式下,辅网络设备周期性的关闭或开启辅网络设备中静态耗电量较高的硬件模块,例如中射频器件等,以达到辅网络设备降低功耗的目的。同时,在节能工作模式下,辅网络设备以大于双连接工作模式的周期,发送无线资源管理(Radio resource management,RRM)测量参考信号以及同步信号/广播信道(SS/PBCH block,SSB)。此时,终端无法与辅网络设备进行数据传输,但可以对辅网络设备进行测量,以保持与辅网络设备同步。In the dual-connection working mode, the terminal can simultaneously perform data transmission with the main network device and the auxiliary network device to increase the data transmission rate of the terminal network. In the energy-saving working mode, the auxiliary network device periodically shuts down or turns on the hardware modules with high static power consumption in the auxiliary network device, such as the radio frequency device, to achieve the purpose of reducing the power consumption of the auxiliary network device. At the same time, in the energy-saving working mode, the auxiliary network device sends a radio resource management (RRM) measurement reference signal and a synchronization signal/broadcast channel (SS/PBCH block, SSB) with a period longer than the dual-connection working mode. At this time, the terminal cannot perform data transmission with the auxiliary network device, but can perform measurements on the auxiliary network device to maintain synchronization with the auxiliary network device.
本申请通过在负载量低时,使得辅网络设备进入节能模式,辅网络设备中存储的终端配置信息没有释放,使得辅网络设备在恢复双连接模式时,终端可以快速与辅网络设备建立连接,提高终端的数据传输速率,进而提高用户体验。In this application, when the load is low, the auxiliary network device enters the energy-saving mode, and the terminal configuration information stored in the auxiliary network device is not released, so that when the auxiliary network device resumes the dual connection mode, the terminal can quickly establish a connection with the auxiliary network device. Increase the data transmission rate of the terminal, thereby improving the user experience.
需要说明的是,图1a-图1d所示的图中,是以第一网路设备(也即主网络设备)为LTE网络设备、以第二网络设备(也即辅网络设备)为NR网络设备来进行示意的。本申请并不仅限于此。也可以为其他类型的网络设备的组合。It should be noted that in the figures shown in Figures 1a-1d, the first network device (that is, the main network device) is the LTE network device, and the second network device (that is, the auxiliary network device) is the NR network. The equipment is used to indicate. This application is not limited to this. It can also be a combination of other types of network equipment.
下面,将结合图2-图5,以第一网络设备为主网络设备、第二网络设备为辅网络设备为例进行描述。In the following, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, taking the first network device as the main network device and the second network device as the auxiliary network device as an example.
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的一种转换方法的示意性流程图。应理解,图2示出了由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图2中的各个操作的变形。如图2所示,该由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换方法可以包括步骤201-207。Fig. 2 shows a schematic flow chart of a conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 2 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the operations in FIG. 2 Deformation of the operation. As shown in FIG. 2, the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include steps 201-207.
201、第一网络设备确定是否满足由双连接工作模式向节能工作模式转换的触发条件。201. The first network device determines whether a trigger condition for switching from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode is met.
本实施例中,由双连接工作模式向节能工作模式转换的触发条件可以包括以下一项或 多项:In this embodiment, the trigger condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include one or more of the following:
第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。The load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold; the first network device and the first network device 2. The load or resource utilization of the network device is lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than the fourth preset threshold, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold .
具体来说,第一网络设备的负荷量或第二网络设备的负荷量可以认为与终端之间的通信数据传输量。当第一网络设备的负荷量低于第一预设门限值、或者检测到第二网络设备的负荷量低于第二预设门限值、或者检测到第一网络设备和第二网络设备的负荷量低于第三预设门限值时,说明终端数据传输量低,仅通过第一网络设备足以承担与终端的数据传输,且数据传输速率不小于预设阈值。此时,可以触发第二网络设备进入节能工作模式。Specifically, the load of the first network device or the load of the second network device can be regarded as the amount of communication data transmission with the terminal. When the load of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold, or it is detected that the load of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold, or the first network device and the second network device are detected When the load is lower than the third preset threshold, it indicates that the terminal data transmission volume is low, and only the first network device is sufficient to undertake the data transmission with the terminal, and the data transmission rate is not less than the preset threshold. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the energy-saving working mode.
上述资源利用率中的资源作为示例可以包括但不限于:为终端设备分配或预留的资源,与核心网之间的终端设备专用的用户面连接等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。其中,为该终端设备分配或预留的资源,例如可以为空口传输资源、NG-U接口传输资源等。与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,例如可以包括传输层信息(transport layer information),数据传输通道,为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息,核心网为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息中的至少一种。Examples of the resources in the above resource utilization rate may include, but are not limited to: resources allocated or reserved for terminal devices, dedicated user plane connections between terminal devices and the core network, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. Among them, the resources allocated or reserved for the terminal device may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, and so on. The dedicated user plane connection between the terminal device and the core network may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, NG-U transport layer address information allocated to the terminal device, and the core network allocates the terminal device At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information.
第一网络设备、第二网络设备的资源利用率还可以包括频域资源利用率、时域资源利用率。时域资源可以是一个或多个符号,也可以是一个或多个时隙,也可以是一个或多个迷你时隙,也可以是一个或多个子帧。频域资源可以是一个或多个RB,也可以是一个或多个RE,也可以是一个或多个载波,也可以是一个或多个小区,也可以是一个或多个部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP)。The resource utilization rate of the first network device and the second network device may also include frequency domain resource utilization rate and time domain resource utilization rate. The time domain resource can be one or more symbols, one or more time slots, one or more mini-slots, or one or more subframes. The frequency domain resource can be one or more RBs, one or more REs, one or more carriers, one or more cells, or one or more bandwidth parts. , BWP).
当第一网络设备的资源利用率低于第一预设门限值、第二网络设备的资源利用率低于第二预设门限值、第一网络设备和第二网络设备的资源利用率低于第三预设门限值时,说明终端数据传输量低,仅通过第一网络设备足以承担与终端的数据传输,且数据传输速率不小于预设阈值。此时,可以触发第二网络设备进入节能工作模式。When the resource utilization rate of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold value, the resource utilization rate of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold value, the resource utilization rates of the first network device and the second network device When it is lower than the third preset threshold value, it indicates that the terminal data transmission volume is low, and only the first network device is sufficient to undertake the data transmission with the terminal, and the data transmission rate is not less than the preset threshold value. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the energy-saving working mode.
202、第一网络设备在检测到满足由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的触发条件时,向第二网络设备发送由双连接模式转换为节能工作模式的工作模式转换请求。202. When detecting that the trigger condition for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied, the first network device sends a working mode switching request for switching from the dual-connection mode to the energy-saving working mode to the second network device.
在本实施例中,第一网络设备在检测到满足201所示的至少一个触发条件时,可以向第一网络设备发送进入节能工作模式的请求。In this embodiment, when detecting that at least one trigger condition shown in 201 is satisfied, the first network device may send a request to enter the energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送比特流数据,直接指示第二网络设备进入节能模式。In a possible implementation manner, the first network device may send bitstream data to the second network device, directly instructing the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备可以采用位图(bitmap)的方式向第二网络设备发送请求,同时采用一比特位询问第二网络设备是否可以进入节能模式。在某些应用场景中,当第一网络设备检测第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于某阈值时,此时第二网络设备与某一终端可能存在数据传输还未传完的情况。而此时进入节能模式时,通常导致与终端之间的数据传输失败。第一网络设备通过采用询问的方式请求第二网络设备进入节能模式,可以待第二网络设备数据传输完毕后进入节能模式,避免数据传输失败。In a possible implementation manner, the first network device may use a bitmap to send a request to the second network device, and at the same time use a bit to inquire whether the second network device can enter the energy-saving mode. In some application scenarios, when the first network device detects that the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than a certain threshold, at this time, the second network device and a terminal may have a situation where the data transmission has not been completed. . When entering the energy-saving mode at this time, data transmission with the terminal usually fails. The first network device requests the second network device to enter the energy-saving mode by adopting an inquiry method, and can enter the energy-saving mode after the data transmission of the second network device is completed, so as to avoid data transmission failure.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送进入节能模式的请求时,还可以包括需要第二网络设备返回的配置参数。当第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时,需 要对各种参数重新配置。从而,终端基于节能工作模式下的配置参数实现与第二网络设备的同步。具体的,第一网络设备可以请求第二网络设备返回的配置参数包括但不限于以下至少一项:第二网络设备在节能工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, when the first network device sends a request to enter the energy-saving mode to the second network device, it may further include configuration parameters that need to be returned by the second network device. When the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode, various parameters need to be reconfigured. Therefore, the terminal realizes synchronization with the second network device based on the configuration parameters in the energy-saving working mode. Specifically, the configuration parameters that the first network device may request the second network device to return include, but are not limited to, at least one of the following: common channel configuration information for the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; The configuration information for the RRM measurement in the radio resource management; the configuration information for the channel state information CSI measurement of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode.
其中,公共信道配置信息包括但不限于公共信道所承载的同步信号的发送周期以及系统消息。Wherein, the common channel configuration information includes, but is not limited to, the transmission period of the synchronization signal carried by the common channel and system messages.
用于RRM测量的信息包括用于信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的资源索引,测量周期,测量带宽等,包括但不限于:子载波间隔:指示CSI-RS的子载波间隔;CSI-RS资源索引:指示CSI-RS资源编号;CSI-RS起始符号位置:指示CSI-RS时域的超始符号;CSI-RS频域位置指示:指示CSI-RS的频域的位置;CSI-RS序列生成的扰码ID;CSI-RS测量周期;CSI-RS测量带宽,指示在哪些RB上进行测量;测量小区ID。具体可参考标准38.331中CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility的相关信息,在此不再赘述。具体实现时,可以对用于RRM测量的CSI-RS信息重新配置,例如改变子载波间隔、改变CSI-RS起始符号位置等;或者,针对已经存在的用于RRM测量的CSI-RS信息,仅改变用于RRM测量的周期,此时用于RRM测量的配置信息中至少包括CSI-RS索引,RRM测量周期。The information used for RRM measurement includes the resource index for the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, measurement period, measurement bandwidth, etc., including but not limited to: subcarrier interval: indicates the subcarrier interval of CSI-RS; CSI-RS resource Index: indicates the CSI-RS resource number; CSI-RS start symbol position: indicates the super-initial symbol of the CSI-RS time domain; CSI-RS frequency domain position indicator: indicates the position of the CSI-RS in the frequency domain; CSI-RS sequence The generated scrambling code ID; CSI-RS measurement period; CSI-RS measurement bandwidth, indicating which RBs are used for measurement; measurement cell ID. For details, please refer to the related information of CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility in the standard 38.331, which will not be repeated here. During specific implementation, the CSI-RS information used for RRM measurement can be reconfigured, such as changing the subcarrier spacing, changing the position of the CSI-RS start symbol, etc.; or, for the existing CSI-RS information used for RRM measurement, Only the period used for RRM measurement is changed. At this time, the configuration information used for RRM measurement includes at least the CSI-RS index and the RRM measurement period.
用于CSI测量的配置信息可以包括但不限于:CSI-RS资源测量信息,CSI的反馈周期。具体可参考标准38.331中CSI-MeasConfig相关信息,在此不再赘述。具体实现时,可以对用于CSI测量的CSI-RS信息重新配置;或者,针对已经存在的用于CSI测量的CSI-RS信息,仅改变用于CSI测量的CSI-RS资源测量信息,CSI的反馈周期,此时用于CSI测量的配置信息中至少包括CSI-RS索引,CSI-RS资源测量信息,CSI的反馈周期。The configuration information used for CSI measurement may include, but is not limited to: CSI-RS resource measurement information, and CSI feedback period. For details, please refer to the CSI-MeasConfig related information in the standard 38.331, which will not be repeated here. During specific implementation, the CSI-RS information used for CSI measurement can be reconfigured; or, for the existing CSI-RS information used for CSI measurement, only the CSI-RS resource measurement information used for CSI measurement can be changed. Feedback period. At this time, the configuration information used for CSI measurement includes at least CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource measurement information, and CSI feedback period.
这里,可以采用位图的方式请求配置参数,其中一位可以代表所询问的一个配置参数。Here, the configuration parameters can be requested in the form of bitmaps, one of which can represent a configuration parameter inquired.
作为示例,针对EN-DC架构的双连接,第一网络设备可以向第二设备请求第二设备在节能工作模式下的配置参数优选的包括SSB发送周期、RRM测量周期;此外,还可以请求的配置参数包括但不限于SSB频域位置、RRM测量资源、CSI测量资源以及测量周期等。可以采用10位位图询问配置参数,当询问参数配置参数为SSB发送周期、RRM测量周期时,可以将10位位图中与SSB发送周期、与RRM测量周期对应的位置“1”,其余位置“0”。As an example, for the dual connectivity of the EN-DC architecture, the first network device can request the second device for the configuration parameters of the second device in the energy-saving working mode, which preferably include the SSB transmission period and the RRM measurement period; in addition, it can also be requested The configuration parameters include, but are not limited to, SSB frequency domain position, RRM measurement resources, CSI measurement resources, and measurement period. You can use a 10-bit bitmap to query the configuration parameters. When the query parameter configuration parameters are SSB transmission period and RRM measurement period, you can set the position corresponding to the SSB transmission period and RRM measurement period to "1" in the 10-bit bitmap, and the remaining positions "0".
这里值得注意的是,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的请求中,也可以不询问第二网络设备在节能工作模式下的配置参数。It is worth noting here that in the request sent by the first network device to the second network device, the configuration parameters of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode may not be asked.
203,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送进入节能工作模式的响应信息。203. The second network device sends response information for entering the energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
在本实施例中,第二网络设备基于当前的状态,可以向第一网络设备发送接受进入节能工作模式或者拒绝进入节能工作模式的响应信息。该响应信息可以采用1比特值。具体的,当比特值为“1”时,可以表示接受进入工作模式;当比特值为“0”时,可以表示拒绝进入节能工作模式。例如,当前第二网络设备与终端正在进行数据传输,若进入节能工作模式时导致数据传输失败,此时第二网络设备可以拒绝进入节能工作模式。In this embodiment, based on the current state, the second network device may send to the first network device a response message of accepting entering the energy-saving working mode or refusing to enter the energy-saving working mode. The response information can take a 1-bit value. Specifically, when the bit value is “1”, it may indicate that the entry into the working mode is accepted; when the bit value is “0”, it may indicate that the entry into the energy-saving working mode is refused. For example, the second network device and the terminal are currently performing data transmission, and if the data transmission fails when entering the energy-saving working mode, the second network device may refuse to enter the energy-saving working mode at this time.
在一些可能的实现方式中,当第二网络设备拒绝进入节能工作模式时,还可以利用比特流指示拒绝的原因值。该原因值例如可以表示当前正在进行数据传输等。In some possible implementation manners, when the second network device refuses to enter the energy-saving working mode, the bitstream may also be used to indicate the value of the reason for the refusal. The cause value may indicate that data transmission is currently being performed, for example.
当第二网络设备在接受进入节能工作模式时,第二网络设备的响应信息可以包括以下 至少一项:第二网络设备在节能工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。When the second network device is accepting to enter the energy-saving working mode, the response information of the second network device may include at least one of the following: common channel configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; and the second network device in the energy-saving working mode Configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in an energy-saving working mode.
204,第一网络设备向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息。204. The first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
具体的,第二网络设备可以管理辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG),SCG中可包括1个或多个载波。当SCG中包含多个载波时,每一个SCG可以划分成多个逻辑小区,该多个逻辑小区包括主辅小区(Primary Secondary Cell,PScell),以及一个或多个辅小区(Secondary Cell,简称为Scell)。每一个逻辑小区与第二网络设备中的载波(例如一个载波、或载波聚合形成的载波)对应。其中,与PScell对应的载波可以称为主载波。如果SCG中只包含一个载波时,则该载波对应的逻辑小区即为PScell。第一网络设备对终端进行配置时,可以建立终端与SCG之间的映射关系,也即是说,一个终端可以与一个或多个SCG对应。第一网络设备可以指示SCG去激活,也可以指示SCG中的载波去激活。当指示SCG中的载波去激活时,也即指示该逻辑小区去激活。其中,去激活也为非激活。在去激活状态下,终端可以对第二网络设备进行测量,但无法与第二网络设备进行数据传输。此处,数据传输不包括RRM测量和公共信道的发送。Specifically, the second network device may manage a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG), and the SCG may include one or more carriers. When the SCG contains multiple carriers, each SCG can be divided into multiple logical cells, the multiple logical cells include primary and secondary cells (Primary Secondary Cell, PScell), and one or more secondary cells (Secondary Cell, abbreviated as Scell). Each logical cell corresponds to a carrier in the second network device (for example, a carrier or a carrier formed by carrier aggregation). Among them, the carrier corresponding to the PScell may be referred to as the primary carrier. If only one carrier is included in the SCG, the logical cell corresponding to the carrier is the PScell. When the first network device configures the terminal, the mapping relationship between the terminal and the SCG may be established, that is, one terminal may correspond to one or more SCGs. The first network device may instruct the SCG to deactivate, or instruct the carrier in the SCG to deactivate. When the carrier in the SCG is instructed to deactivate, that is, the logical cell is instructed to deactivate. Among them, deactivation is also inactive. In the deactivated state, the terminal can perform measurements on the second network device, but cannot perform data transmission with the second network device. Here, data transmission does not include RRM measurement and common channel transmission.
当第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时,第一网络设备可以指示第二网络设备中的部分载波或者全部载波工作在去激活状态。通常,工作在去激活状态的载波的数目越多,第二网络设备功耗越小。第一网络设备可以根据第二网络设备的负载状态、能耗大小等来决定第二网络设备中、去激活态的载波的数目。When the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode, the first network device may instruct some or all of the carriers in the second network device to work in a deactivated state. Generally, the more the number of carriers working in the deactivated state, the lower the power consumption of the second network device. The first network device may determine the number of carriers in the deactivated state in the second network device according to the load status, energy consumption, etc. of the second network device.
由于与第一网络设备和第二网络设备进行双连接通信的终端有很多,上述第一指示信息中包括终端ID,从而可以指示哪些终端进入节能工作模式。Since there are many terminals that perform dual-connection communication with the first network device and the second network device, the above-mentioned first indication information includes the terminal ID, so as to indicate which terminals enter the energy-saving working mode.
第一指示信息还包括SCG索引以及载波索引。具体的,SCG索引用于指示哪一个SCG进入去激活状态,载波索引用于指示SCG中的哪一个载波进入去激活状态。其中,SCG索引和载波索引均可以采用位图的方式设置。以SCG索引为例,位图中的每一位代表一个SCG。位图中,当代表某一SCG的值为“0”时,可以表示该SCG进入去激活状态;当代表某一SCG的值为“1”时,可以表示该SCG为激活状态。The first indication information also includes the SCG index and the carrier index. Specifically, the SCG index is used to indicate which SCG enters the deactivated state, and the carrier index is used to indicate which carrier in the SCG enters the deactivated state. Among them, both the SCG index and the carrier index can be set in a bitmap manner. Taking the SCG index as an example, each bit in the bitmap represents an SCG. In the bitmap, when the value representing a certain SCG is "0", it can indicate that the SCG has entered the deactivated state; when the value representing a certain SCG is "1", it can indicate that the SCG is in the activated state.
可选的,第一网络设备可以将第二网络设备中的载波全部设置在去激活状态。从而,第一指示信息可以指示第二网络设备中的载波均工作在去激活状态。Optionally, the first network device may set all the carriers in the second network device in a deactivated state. Therefore, the first indication information may indicate that the carriers in the second network device are all working in a deactivated state.
可选的,第一网络设备可以将与第二网络设备对应的SCG中的PScell设置为休眠状态。此时,第一指示信息可以指示第二网络设备中的PScell工作在休眠状态,指示该SCG中的其它载波工作在去激活状态。Optionally, the first network device may set the PScell in the SCG corresponding to the second network device to a dormant state. At this time, the first indication information may indicate that the PScell in the second network device is working in a dormant state, and indicate that other carriers in the SCG are working in a deactivated state.
这里值得注意的是,当第二网络设备中的载波设置为休眠状态时,终端需要对第二网络设备进行CSI测量和上报;当第二网络设备中的载波设置为去激活状态时,终端不需要对第二网络设备进行CSI测量和上报。It is worth noting here that when the carrier in the second network device is set to the dormant state, the terminal needs to perform CSI measurement and reporting on the second network device; when the carrier in the second network device is set to the deactivated state, the terminal does not It is necessary to perform CSI measurement and report on the second network device.
第一指示信息还可以包括在节能工作模式下,第二网络设备用于RRM测量的配置信息、第二网络设备用于CSI测量的配置信息。The first indication information may also include configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and configuration information used by the second network device for CSI measurement in the energy-saving working mode.
可选的,第一网络设备可以通过MAC CE信令向终端发送第一指示信息。Optionally, the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through MAC CE signaling.
或者,第一网络设备可以通过DCI信令向终端发送第一指示信息。Alternatively, the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through DCI signaling.
或者,第一网络设备可以通过RRC信令向终端发送第一指示信息。Alternatively, the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal through RRC signaling.
205,终端向第一网络设备发送第二指示信息。205. The terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
在本实施例中,第二指示信息用于指示终端配置完成。In this embodiment, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
作为示例,当第一网络设备通过MAC CE信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,终端可以通过MAC CE信令发送第二指示信息。通常,MAC CE信令通过PDSCH信道承载,终端可以通过ACK/NACK指示是否配置完成。As an example, when the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through MAC CE signaling, the terminal may send the second indication information through MAC CE signaling. Generally, MAC CE signaling is carried through the PDSCH channel, and the terminal can indicate whether the configuration is complete through ACK/NACK.
作为示例,当第一网络设备通过RRC信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,终端可以对RRC信令携带的第一指示信息进行各种配置。当终端配置完成后,可以向第一网路设备发送RRC信令携带的第一指示信息配置完成。例如,现有的TS36.331标准中定义的“RRCReconfiguration Complete”信令,即为终端需要给第一网络设备发送的信令。As an example, when the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through RRC signaling, the terminal may perform various configurations on the first indication information carried in the RRC signaling. After the terminal configuration is completed, the configuration of the first indication information carried in the RRC signaling may be sent to the first network device. For example, the "RRCReconfiguration Complete" signaling defined in the existing TS36.331 standard is the signaling that the terminal needs to send to the first network device.
需要说明的是,205并不是必须的步骤。在其他一些可能的实现方式中,例如,当第一网络设备通过DIC信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,相当于指示终端进入节能工作模式。此时,终端不需要向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息。It should be noted that 205 is not a necessary step. In some other possible implementation manners, for example, when the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through DIC signaling, it is equivalent to instructing the terminal to enter the energy-saving working mode. At this time, the terminal does not need to send the second indication information to the second network device.
206:第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息。206: The first network device sends third indication information to the second network device.
在本实施例中,第一网络设备在收到终端发送的用于指示配置完成的第二指示信息后,可以向第二网络设备发送用于指示终端配置完成的第三指示信息。In this embodiment, after receiving the second indication information sent by the terminal for indicating that the configuration is complete, the first network device may send third indication information for indicating that the configuration of the terminal is complete to the second network device.
在某一场景中,终端可能由于某些原因无法完成配置导致第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时,终端对第二网络设备的测量不准确以至于无法与第二网络设备同步(例如仍然采用双连接工作模式下的配置信息对第二网络设备进行测量)。,这样一来,导致终端由节能工作模式转向双连接工作模式时,由于终端与第二网络设备信号不同步无法快速进入双连接模式,进而影响终端与网络设备之间的信息传输速率。通过第三指示信息发送给第二网络设备,可以使得第二网络设备预留出一定的时间等待终端进行配置,提高终端配置成功率。In a certain scenario, the terminal may not be able to complete the configuration due to some reasons, and when the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode, the measurement of the second network device by the terminal is inaccurate and cannot be synchronized with the second network device (for example, dual The configuration information in the connection working mode measures the second network device). As a result, when the terminal changes from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, the terminal cannot quickly enter the dual-connection mode because the signal is not synchronized with the second network device, which affects the information transmission rate between the terminal and the network device. By sending the third instruction information to the second network device, the second network device can reserve a certain amount of time to wait for the terminal to configure, thereby improving the success rate of terminal configuration.
207:第二网络设备进入节能工作模式。207: The second network device enters an energy-saving working mode.
需要说明的是,本申请对各步骤的顺序不做限定。当第二网络设备接收到第一网络设备发送的请求后,在第二网络设备在确定可以进入节能模式的情况下,可以直接进入节能工作模式。也即是说,第二网络设备可以不需要在接收到第三指示信息之后再进入节能工作模式。或者,第二网络设备可以在进入节能工作模式后,向第一网络设备发送响应信息,以及从第一网络设备接收第三指示信息等。此时,上述各步骤的顺序可以为:201-202-207-203-204-205。It should be noted that this application does not limit the order of the steps. After the second network device receives the request sent by the first network device, the second network device can directly enter the energy-saving working mode if it is determined that it can enter the energy-saving mode. In other words, the second network device may not need to enter the energy-saving working mode after receiving the third instruction information. Alternatively, the second network device may send response information to the first network device and receive third indication information from the first network device after entering the energy-saving working mode. At this time, the sequence of the above steps can be: 201-202-207-203-204-205.
此外,206也不是必要步骤。在某些应用场景中,第一网络设备可以不需要向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息。In addition, 206 is not a necessary step. In some application scenarios, the first network device may not need to send the third indication information to the second network device.
请继续参考图3,其示出了本申请实施例提供的由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的又一种转换方法的示意性流程图。应理解,图3示出了由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图2中的各个操作的变形。如图3所示,该由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换方法可以包括步骤301-307。Please continue to refer to FIG. 3, which shows a schematic flowchart of yet another conversion method from a dual-connection working mode to an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 3 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the operations in FIG. 2 Deformation of the operation. As shown in FIG. 3, the conversion method from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include steps 301-307.
步骤301,第二网络设备确定是否满足由双连接工作模式向节能工作模式转换的触发 条件。Step 301: The second network device determines whether the triggering condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied.
本实施例中,由双连接工作模式向节能工作模式转换的触发条件可以包括以下一项或多项:In this embodiment, the trigger condition for the transition from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode may include one or more of the following:
第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。The load or resource utilization of the first network device is lower than the first preset threshold; the load or resource utilization of the second network device is lower than the second preset threshold; the first network device and the first network device 2. The load or resource utilization of the network device is lower than the third preset threshold; the energy consumption of the second network device is higher than the fourth preset threshold, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold .
302,第二网络设备在检测到满足由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的触发条件时,向第一网络设备发送由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的工作模式转换请求。302. When detecting that the trigger condition for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is satisfied, the second network device sends to the first network device a working mode conversion request for switching from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode.
这里,进入节能工作模式的请求中,可以携带有以下至少一项信息:第二网络设备在节能工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;第二网络设备在节能工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。Here, the request to enter the energy-saving working mode may carry at least one of the following information: the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode; the second network device used for radio resource management RRM measurement in the energy-saving working mode Configuration information; configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the energy-saving working mode.
303,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送进入节能工作模式的响应信息。303. The first network device sends response information for entering the energy-saving working mode to the second network device.
第一网络设备在接收到第二网络设备发送的请求后,可以根据当前自身的状态,确定是否允许第二网络设备进入节能工作模式。从而可以向第一网络设备发送接受进入节能工作模式或者拒绝进入节能工作模式的响应信息。该响应信息可以采用1比特值。After receiving the request sent by the second network device, the first network device may determine whether to allow the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode according to its current state. Thereby, a response message of accepting entering the energy-saving working mode or refusing to enter the energy-saving working mode can be sent to the first network device. The response information can take a 1-bit value.
304,第一网络设备向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息。304. The first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
第一网络设备在确定出可以允许第二网络设备进入节能工作模式后,可以向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送第一指示信息。该第一指示信息的具体内容可以参考204所示的第一指示信息的内容,在此不再赘述。After determining that the second network device can be allowed to enter the energy-saving working mode, the first network device may send the first indication information to the terminal connected to the second network device. For the specific content of the first indication information, reference may be made to the content of the first indication information shown in 204, which will not be repeated here.
305,终端向第一网络设备发送第二指示信息。305. The terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
306:第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息。306: The first network device sends third indication information to the second network device.
307:第二网络进入节能工作模式。307: The second network enters an energy-saving working mode.
305-307的具体实现以及各指示信息所包括的内容可以参考图2所示的205-207的具体描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific implementation of 305-307 and the content included in each indication information, reference may be made to the specific description of 205-207 shown in FIG. 2, which will not be repeated here.
从图3中可以看出,与图2所示的实施例不同的是,图3所示的实施例是由第二网路设备确定是否满足由双连接模式转换为节能模式的触发条件。从而,可以由第一网络设备和第二网络设备同时监控双连接系统的功耗,提高监控效果,有利于降低双连接系统功耗。It can be seen from FIG. 3 that, unlike the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is that the second network device determines whether the trigger condition for switching from the dual connection mode to the energy saving mode is satisfied. Therefore, the first network device and the second network device can simultaneously monitor the power consumption of the dual-connection system, which improves the monitoring effect and helps reduce the power consumption of the dual-connection system.
请继续参考图4,其示出了本申请实施例提供的由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的一种转换方法的示意性流程图。如图4所示,该由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的转换方法可以包括步骤401-407。Please continue to refer to FIG. 4, which shows a schematic flowchart of a conversion method from an energy-saving working mode to a dual-connection working mode according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the conversion method from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode may include steps 401-407.
401、第一网络设备确定是否满足由节能工作模式向双连接工作模式转换的触发条件。401. The first network device determines whether the triggering condition for the transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode is satisfied.
本实施例中,由节能工作模式向双连接工作模式转换的触发条件可以包括以下一项或多项:In this embodiment, the trigger condition for the transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode may include one or more of the following:
第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率高于预设门限值;终端请求的数据传输速率高于所述第一网络设备的数据传输速率;第一网络的能耗大于预设门限值、且在双连接工作模 式下第一网络设备和第二网络设备的能耗之和小于第一网络的能耗。The load or resource utilization of the first network device is higher than the preset threshold; the data transmission rate requested by the terminal is higher than the data transmission rate of the first network device; the energy consumption of the first network is greater than the preset threshold , And in the dual-connection working mode, the sum of the energy consumption of the first network device and the second network device is less than the energy consumption of the first network.
具体来说,当第一网络设备的负荷量高于第一预设门限值时,说明终端数据传输量超过第一网络设备的负荷量,仅通过第一网络设备不能够承担与终端的数据传输。此时,可以触发第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式。Specifically, when the load of the first network device is higher than the first preset threshold, it means that the data transmission volume of the terminal exceeds the load of the first network device, and the first network device alone cannot bear the data with the terminal. transmission. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
上述资源利用率中的资源作为示例可以包括但不限于频域资源利用率、时域资源利用率等。具体所包括的资源可以参考201中资源的描述,在此不再赘述。当第一网络设备的资源利用率高于预设门限值时,说明终端数据传输量超过第一网络设备的负荷量,仅通过第一网络设备不能够承担与终端的数据传输。此时,可以触发第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式。The resources in the above resource utilization rate may include, but are not limited to, frequency domain resource utilization rate, time domain resource utilization rate, etc. as examples. For the specific resources included, please refer to the description of the resources in 201, which will not be repeated here. When the resource utilization rate of the first network device is higher than the preset threshold, it indicates that the data transmission volume of the terminal exceeds the load volume of the first network device, and the data transmission with the terminal cannot be undertaken by the first network device alone. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
在一个具体的应用场景中,当前第一网络设备与终端的最大数据传输速率为100Mbit/s。而终端所请求的数据传输速率为200Mbit/s。虽然此时第一网络设备的负荷量并未高于预设门限值,但由于第一网络设备的最大数据传输速率小于终端请求的数据传输速率。此时,可以触发第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式。In a specific application scenario, the current maximum data transmission rate between the first network device and the terminal is 100 Mbit/s. The data transmission rate requested by the terminal is 200 Mbit/s. Although the load of the first network device is not higher than the preset threshold at this time, the maximum data transmission rate of the first network device is less than the data transmission rate requested by the terminal. At this time, the second network device can be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
第一网络设备可以根据网络设备的负载量估算出网络设备的能耗。当第一网络设备估算出其自身的功耗大于预设门限值,但第二网络设备进入双连接模式后,第一网路设备将部分负载转移至第二网络设备,此时第一网络设备和第二网路设备总的功耗小于第一网络设备当前的功耗时,也可以触发第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式。The first network device can estimate the energy consumption of the network device according to the load of the network device. When the first network device estimates that its own power consumption is greater than the preset threshold, but after the second network device enters the dual-connection mode, the first network device transfers part of the load to the second network device. At this time, the first network device When the total power consumption of the device and the second network device is less than the current power consumption of the first network device, the second network device may also be triggered to enter the dual-connection working mode.
402、第一网络设备在检测到满足由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的触发条件时,向第二网络设备发送由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的工作模式转换请求。402. When the first network device detects that the triggering condition for switching from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode is met, it sends a working mode conversion request from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode to the second network device.
在本实施例中,第一网络设备在检测到满足401所示的至少一个触发条件时,可以向第一网络设备发送进入双连接工作模式的请求。In this embodiment, when detecting that at least one trigger condition shown in 401 is satisfied, the first network device may send a request to enter the dual-connection working mode to the first network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送比特流数据,直接指示第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式。In a possible implementation manner, the first network device may send bit stream data to the second network device, directly instructing the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备可以采用位图(bitmap)的方式向第二网络设备发送请求,同时采用一比特位询问第二网络设备是否可以进入双连接模式。In a possible implementation manner, the first network device may use a bitmap to send a request to the second network device, and at the same time use a bit to inquire whether the second network device can enter the dual connection mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送进入双连接模式的请求时,还可以包括需要第二网络设备返回的配置参数。当第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式时,需要对各种参数重新配置,以便于终端快速接入第二网络设备。In a possible implementation manner, when the first network device sends a request for entering the dual connection mode to the second network device, it may further include configuration parameters that need to be returned by the second network device. When the second network device enters the dual-connection working mode, various parameters need to be reconfigured so that the terminal can quickly access the second network device.
具体的,第一网络设备可以请求第二网络设备返回的配置参数包括但不限于以下至少一项:第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。这里,可以采用位图的方式请求配置参数,其中一位可以代表所询问的一个配置参数。Specifically, the configuration parameters that the first network device may request the second network device to return include but are not limited to at least one of the following: common channel configuration information for the second network device in the dual-connection working mode; and the second network device in the dual-connection working mode The configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH is downloaded; the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the dual connection working mode; the configuration information of the second network device used for radio resource management RRM measurement in the dual connection working mode. Here, the configuration parameters can be requested in the form of bitmaps, one of which can represent a configuration parameter inquired.
这里值得注意的是,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的请求中,也可以不询问第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下的配置参数。It is worth noting here that in the request sent by the first network device to the second network device, the configuration parameters of the second network device in the dual-connection working mode may not be asked.
403,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送进入双连接工作模式的响应信息。403. The second network device sends a response message for entering the dual-connection working mode to the first network device.
在本实施例中,第二网络设备基于当前的状态,可以向第一网络设备发送接受进入双连接工作模式或者拒绝进入双连接工作模式的响应信息。该响应信息可以采用1比特值。具体的,当比特值为“1”时,可以表示接受进入工作模式;当比特值为“0”时,可以表 示拒绝进入双连接工作模式。In this embodiment, based on the current state, the second network device may send a response message to the first network device to accept to enter the dual-connection working mode or to refuse to enter the dual-connection working mode. The response information can take a 1-bit value. Specifically, when the bit value is "1", it can indicate that the entry into the working mode is accepted; when the bit value is "0", it can indicate that it is refused to enter the dual-connection working mode.
在一些可能的实现方式中,当第二网络设备拒绝进入双连接工作模式时,还可以利用比特流指示拒绝的原因值。In some possible implementation manners, when the second network device refuses to enter the dual-connection working mode, the bit stream may also be used to indicate the reason value of the refusal.
当第二网络设备在接受进入双连接工作模式时,第二网络设备的响应信息可以包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;第二网络设备在双连接工作模式下公共信道配置信息;第二网络设备在所述接工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。When the second network device is accepting to enter the dual connectivity operating mode, the response information of the second network device may include at least one of the following: configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the dual connectivity operating mode; second The network device shares channel configuration information in the dual connection working mode; the second network device uses configuration information for radio resource management RRM measurement in the connection working mode.
404,第一网络设备向与第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息。404. The first network device sends first instruction information for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device.
第二网络设备在节能工作模式时,第二网络设备中的部分载波或全部载波工作在去激活状态。而当第二网络设备由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式时,需要激活第二网络设备的载波,以使得各载波工作在激活状态。When the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode, some or all of the carriers in the second network device work in a deactivated state. When the second network device is converted from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, the carrier of the second network device needs to be activated, so that the carriers work in the activated state.
第一网络设备可以记录有与第二网络设备连接的终端ID。从而,通过终端ID可以通知哪些终端由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式。The first network device may record the ID of the terminal connected to the second network device. Therefore, the terminal ID can be used to inform which terminals are converted from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode.
由此,第一指示信息可以包括终端ID、第二网络设备的SCG索引以及载波索引。具体的,SCG索引用于指示哪一个SCG进入激活状态,载波索引用于指示SCG中的哪些载波进入激活状态。其中,SCG索引和载波索引均可以采用位图的方式设置。Thus, the first indication information may include the terminal ID, the SCG index of the second network device, and the carrier index. Specifically, the SCG index is used to indicate which SCG enters the active state, and the carrier index is used to indicate which carriers in the SCG enter the active state. Among them, both the SCG index and the carrier index can be set in a bitmap manner.
可选的,第一网络设备从第二网络设备接收的响应信息中可以获知,在由节能工作模式转向双连接工作模式时,第二网络设备用于RRM测量的配置信息以及公共信道周期是否发生改变。当第一网络设备在确定出用于RRM测量的配置信息以及公共信道周期发生改变时,第一指示信息中还需要包括第二网络设备用于RRM测量的配置信息以及公共信道周期。Optionally, the first network device can learn from the response information received by the second network device that the configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and whether the common channel period occurs when the energy-saving working mode is switched to the dual-connection working mode change. When the first network device determines that the configuration information used for RRM measurement and the common channel period change, the first indication information also needs to include the configuration information used by the second network device for RRM measurement and the common channel period.
405,终端向第一网络设备发送第二指示信息。405. The terminal sends second indication information to the first network device.
在本实施例中,第二指示信息用于指示终端配置完成。In this embodiment, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
该步骤的具体实现可以参考图2所示的205的描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific implementation of this step, reference may be made to the description of 205 shown in FIG. 2, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,405并不是必须的步骤。在一些可能的实现方式中,例如,当第一网络设备通过DIC信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,相当于指示终端进入双连接工作模式。此时,终端不需要向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息。It should be noted that 405 is not a necessary step. In some possible implementation manners, for example, when the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through DIC signaling, it is equivalent to instructing the terminal to enter the dual-connection working mode. At this time, the terminal does not need to send the second indication information to the second network device.
406:终端向第二网络设备发送随机接入请求。406: The terminal sends a random access request to the second network device.
在本实施例中,当终端从第一网络设备接收到第一指示信息后,可以基于第一指示信息对各参数进行配置。从而,当终端对各参数配置完成后,可以向第二网络设备发送随机接入请求。In this embodiment, after receiving the first indication information from the first network device, the terminal may configure various parameters based on the first indication information. Therefore, after the terminal finishes configuring each parameter, it can send a random access request to the second network device.
407:第二网络设备确定终端随机接入成功,进入双连接工作模式。407: The second network device determines that the random access of the terminal succeeds, and enters the dual-connection working mode.
在本实施例中,当第二网络设备在确定出终端随机接入成功后,可以确定进入了双连接工作模式。此时可以与终端进行数据传输。In this embodiment, after the second network device determines that the terminal has successfully accessed randomly, it can be determined to enter the dual-connection working mode. At this time, data transmission can be carried out with the terminal.
应理解,图4示出的由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的转换方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图4中的各个操作的变形。此外,图4中的各个步骤可以按照与图4呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图4中的全部操作。例如,当终端接收到第一网络设备发送的第一指示信息后, 可以不需要向第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,直接向第二网络设备发送随机接入请求。此时,405并不是必须要执行的步骤。It should be understood that FIG. 4 shows the steps or operations of the conversion method from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or each of the steps in FIG. 4 Deformation of the operation. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 4 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 4, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 4 are to be performed. For example, after receiving the first indication information sent by the first network device, the terminal may directly send the random access request to the second network device without sending the second indication information to the first network device. At this time, 405 is not a necessary step.
从图2-图4所示的实施例中可以看出,在第二网络设备由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的过程中、或者由双连接工作模式转换成节能工作模式的过程中,每次进行工作转换时,第二网络设备均需要向第一网络设备以及终端交换公共信息、RRM测量等配置信息。It can be seen from the embodiments shown in Figures 2 to 4 that during the process of the second network device being converted from the energy-saving operating mode to the dual-connection operating mode, or during the process of converting from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode, Every time a work transition is performed, the second network device needs to exchange configuration information such as public information and RRM measurement with the first network device and the terminal.
请继续参考图5,其示出了本申请实施例提供的一种节能工作模式的参数预配置方法的示意性流程图。第二网络设备在第一次进入节能工作模式之前,可以对节能工作模式的参数进行预配置。从而,后续第二网络设备在进行模式转换工程中,不需要每次都向第一网络设备交换诸如RRM测量等配置信息,从而可以进一步降低信令开销。结合图5,对节能工作模式的参数预配置方法进行详细描述。Please continue to refer to FIG. 5, which shows a schematic flowchart of a parameter pre-configuration method of an energy-saving working mode provided by an embodiment of the present application. Before entering the energy-saving operating mode for the first time, the second network device may pre-configure the parameters of the energy-saving operating mode. Therefore, during the subsequent mode conversion project, the second network device does not need to exchange configuration information such as RRM measurement with the first network device every time, thereby further reducing signaling overhead. With reference to Figure 5, the parameter pre-configuration method of the energy-saving working mode is described in detail.
501、第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送在节能工作模式下的配置信息。501. The second network device sends configuration information in an energy-saving working mode to the first network device.
在本实施例中,第二网络设备在节能工作模式下的配置信息可以包括一组或多组配置参数。每一组配置参数包括该组配置参数对应的配置标识,也可以称为配置索引。每一组配置参数还包括以下至少一项:公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。In this embodiment, the configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode may include one or more sets of configuration parameters. Each group of configuration parameters includes the configuration identifier corresponding to the group of configuration parameters, which may also be referred to as a configuration index. Each set of configuration parameters also includes at least one of the following: common channel configuration information, configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement, and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement.
具体的,当配置信息包括多组配置参数时,每一组配置参数不相同。也即是说,配置标识1的公共信道配置信息、RRM测量的配置信息、CSI测量的配置信息与配置标识2的公共信道配置信息、RRM测量的配置信息、CSI测量的配置信息不相同。通常,配置参数中所配置的例如RRM测量周期、公共信道发送周期等越长,节能增益越大。从而,第二网络设置在进入节能工作模式时,可以从上述多组配置参数中选择采用周期最长的一组配置参数。Specifically, when the configuration information includes multiple sets of configuration parameters, each set of configuration parameters is different. That is to say, the common channel configuration information of configuration identifier 1, the configuration information of RRM measurement, and the configuration information of CSI measurement are different from the common channel configuration information of configuration identifier 2, the configuration information of RRM measurement, and the configuration information of CSI measurement. Generally, the longer the RRM measurement period and the common channel transmission period are configured in the configuration parameters, the greater the energy-saving gain. Therefore, when the second network setting enters the energy-saving working mode, a group of configuration parameters with the longest adoption period can be selected from the foregoing multiple groups of configuration parameters.
在某些场景中,由于RRM测量周期、公共信道发送周期过长导致终端无法与第二网络设备保持同步或者导致终端在一定时间内无法对第二网络设备进行测量。此时,终端通常会触发删除第二网络设备的请求。第二网络设备接收到该请求后,可以重新选择一组配置参数,发送至第一网络设备,从而第一网络设备可以将该新的配置参数发送至终端。In some scenarios, the terminal cannot maintain synchronization with the second network device or the terminal cannot perform measurement on the second network device within a certain period of time due to the excessively long RRM measurement period and the common channel transmission period. At this time, the terminal usually triggers a request to delete the second network device. After receiving the request, the second network device can re-select a set of configuration parameters and send it to the first network device, so that the first network device can send the new configuration parameters to the terminal.
为了便于后续终端在第二网络设备进入节能模式时,保持对第二网络设备进行RRM测量和同步信号检测,在进行节能工作模式预配置时,第二网络设备需要将每一组配置参数均发送给第一网络设备。In order to facilitate the subsequent terminal to keep the RRM measurement and synchronization signal detection on the second network device when the second network device enters the energy-saving mode, the second network device needs to send each set of configuration parameters when pre-configuring the energy-saving working mode To the first network device.
502,第一网络设备将第二网络设备在节能工作模式下的配置信息发送至终端。502. The first network device sends the configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode to the terminal.
第一网络设备在接收到第二网络设备发送的在节能工作模式下的配置信息之后,可以将配置信息发送至终端,从而使得终端在第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时,针对不同的配置参数进行配置。After the first network device receives the configuration information in the energy-saving working mode sent by the second network device, it can send the configuration information to the terminal, so that the terminal can set different configuration parameters for different configuration parameters when the second network device enters the energy-saving working mode. Configure it.
可选的,第一网络设备可以通过RRC信令发送预配置信息;或者,第一网络设备可以通过MAC CE信令发送预配置信息;或者,第一网络设备可以通过DCI信令发送预配置信息。Optionally, the first network device may send pre-configuration information through RRC signaling; or, the first network device may send pre-configuration information through MAC CE signaling; or, the first network device may send pre-configuration information through DCI signaling .
可选的,在该步骤之前或之后,第一网络设备还可以向第二网络设备发送响应信息。从而,第二网络设备可以确定第一网络设备是否接收到第二网络设备在节能工作模式下的 配置。同时,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的响应信息中,可以用1比特指示是否接受第二网络设备的配置请求,当指示拒绝第二网络设备的配置请求时,还可以利用多个比特指示拒绝的原因值。Optionally, before or after this step, the first network device may also send response information to the second network device. Thus, the second network device can determine whether the first network device has received the configuration of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode. At the same time, in the response message sent by the first network device to the second network device, one bit can be used to indicate whether to accept the configuration request of the second network device, and multiple bits can also be used when instructing to reject the configuration request of the second network device. Value indicating the reason for rejection.
可选的,终端在接收到第一网络发送的第二网络设备在节能工作模式下的配置信息后,可以基于该配置信息进行配置。待配置完成后,可以向第一网络设备发送配置完成的指示信息。作为示例,当第一网络设备通过RRC信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,终端可以通过RRC信令向第一网络设备发送用于指示配置完成的信息。当第一网络设备通过MAC CE信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,终端可以通过MAC CE信令向第一网络设备发送用于指示配置完成的信息。当第一网络设备通过DCI信令向终端发送第一指示信息时,终端可以不需要向第一网络设备发送配置完成的指示信息。Optionally, after receiving the configuration information of the second network device in the energy-saving working mode sent by the first network, the terminal may perform configuration based on the configuration information. After the configuration is completed, the instruction information indicating that the configuration is completed can be sent to the first network device. As an example, when the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through RRC signaling, the terminal may send information for indicating that the configuration is complete to the first network device through RRC signaling. When the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through MAC CE signaling, the terminal may send information for indicating that the configuration is complete to the first network device through MAC CE signaling. When the first network device sends the first indication information to the terminal through DCI signaling, the terminal may not need to send the configuration completion indication information to the first network device.
基于图5所示的对节能工作模式下第二网络设备信息的预配置,进一步结合图2,对由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的一种转换方法进行进一步描述。Based on the pre-configuration of the second network device information in the energy-saving working mode shown in FIG. 5, and further combining with FIG. 2, a conversion method for converting from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is further described.
这里,对节能工作模式进行预配置后,由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换步骤与图2所示的各设备之间的交互步骤相同。不同的是,各设备所发送的诸如请求信息、响应信息、指示信息的内容不同。Here, after the energy-saving operating mode is pre-configured, the conversion steps from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 2. The difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
其中,在图2所示的202中,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送进入节能工作模式的请求时,除了请求第二网络设备进入节能工作模式外,可以携带用于询问第二网络设备在节能工作模式下所采用的配置参数的配置标识。也即是说,由于此前各配置参数已经对诸如公共信道配置信息、RRM测量的配置信息、CSI测量的配置信息等完成配置,此时第一网络设备可以不需要询问公共信道配置信息、RRM测量的配置信息、CSI测量的配置信息等参数,从而降低信令开销。Wherein, in 202 shown in FIG. 2, when the first network device sends a request to the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, it can be carried for querying the second network device The configuration identifier of the configuration parameter used in the energy-saving working mode. In other words, since the previous configuration parameters have been configured for common channel configuration information, RRM measurement configuration information, CSI measurement configuration information, etc., the first network device does not need to inquire about common channel configuration information, RRM measurement, etc. The configuration information of CSI, the configuration information of CSI measurement and other parameters, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
在图2所示的203中,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的响应信息中,除了包括指示是否可以进入节能工作模式外,还包括进入节能工作模式时所采用的配置参数的配置标识。具体的,第二网络设备可以利用bitmap的方式指示所采用的配置参数的配置标识。假设第二网络设备预先配置了5组配置参数,可以采用5位bitmap指示,第一位用于指示配置标识1、第二位用于指示配置标识2、第三位用于指示配置标识3、第四位用于指示配置标识4、第五位用于指示配置标识5。每一位中,“0”代表不采用该配置标识对应的配置参数,“1”代表采用该配置标识对应的配置参数。当第二网络设备采用配置标识2对应的配置参数时,可以将bitmap设置为“01000”,从而指示采用配置标识2对配置参数。In 203 shown in Figure 2, the response message sent by the second network device to the first network device not only indicates whether it can enter the energy-saving working mode, but also includes the configuration identifier of the configuration parameters used when entering the energy-saving working mode. . Specifically, the second network device may use a bitmap to indicate the configuration identifier of the adopted configuration parameter. Assuming that the second network device is pre-configured with 5 sets of configuration parameters, a 5-bit bitmap can be used to indicate, the first bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 1, the second bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 2, and the third bit is used to indicate the configuration identification 3. The fourth digit is used to indicate configuration identification 4, and the fifth digit is used to indicate configuration identification 5. In each digit, "0" means not to use the configuration parameter corresponding to the configuration identifier, and "1" means to use the configuration parameter corresponding to the configuration identifier. When the second network device adopts the configuration parameter corresponding to the configuration identifier 2, the bitmap can be set to "01000", thereby indicating that the configuration identifier 2 is used for the configuration parameter.
在图2所示的204中,第一网络设备向终端发送的用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息中,该第一指示信息除了包括用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息、用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的载波的状态信息中的一项或多项外,还包括用于指示第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时所采用的配置参数对应的配置标识。In 204 shown in FIG. 2, in the first indication information used to instruct to enter the energy-saving working mode sent by the first network device to the terminal, the first indication information includes in addition to indicating that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode. In addition to one or more of the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG and the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the energy-saving operating mode, it also includes one or more of the status information used to instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving operating mode The configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter used at the time.
基于图5所示的对节能工作模式下第二网络设备信息的预配置,进一步结合图3,对由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的另一种转换方法进行进一步描述。Based on the pre-configuration of the second network device information in the energy-saving working mode shown in FIG. 5, and further referring to FIG. 3, another conversion method for converting from the dual-connection working mode to the energy-saving working mode is further described.
这里,对节能工作模式进行预配置后,由双连接工作模式转换为节能工作模式的转换步骤与图3所示的各设备之间的交互步骤相同。不同的是,各设备所发送的诸如请求信息、响应信息、指示信息的内容不同。Here, after the energy-saving operating mode is pre-configured, the conversion steps from the dual-connection operating mode to the energy-saving operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 3. The difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
其中,在图3所示的302中,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送进入节能工作模式的请求时,除了请求第二网络设备进入节能工作模式外,还可以携带第二网络设备在节能工作模式下所采用的配置参数的配置标识。Wherein, in 302 shown in FIG. 3, when the second network device sends a request to the first network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the energy-saving working mode, it can also carry the second network device in the energy-saving mode. The configuration identifier of the configuration parameter used in the working mode.
在图3所示的304中,第一网络设备向终端发送的用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息中,该第一指示信息除了包括用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息、用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的载波的状态信息中的一项或多项外,还包括用于指示第二网络设备进入节能工作模式时所采用的配置参数对应的配置标识。In 304 shown in FIG. 3, in the first indication information sent by the first network device to the terminal for instructing to enter the energy-saving working mode, the first indication information includes in addition to indicating that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode. In addition to one or more of the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG and the status information of the carrier of the second network device in the energy-saving operating mode, it also includes one or more of the status information used to instruct the second network device to enter the energy-saving operating mode The configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter used at the time.
基于图5所示的对节能工作模式下第二网络设备信息的预配置,进一步结合图4,对由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的一种转换方法进行进一步描述。Based on the pre-configuration of the second network device information in the energy-saving working mode shown in FIG. 5, and further referring to FIG. 4, a conversion method for converting from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode is further described.
这里,对节能工作模式进行预配置后,由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的转换步骤与图4所示的各设备之间的交互步骤相同。不同的是,各设备所发送的诸如请求信息、响应信息、指示信息的内容不同。Here, after the energy-saving operating mode is pre-configured, the conversion steps from the energy-saving operating mode to the dual-connection operating mode are the same as the interaction steps between the devices shown in FIG. 4. The difference is that the content of the request information, response information, and instruction information sent by each device is different.
其中,在图4所示的402中,第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送进入双连接工作模式的请求时,除了请求第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式外,可以携带用于询问第二网络设备在进入双连接工作模式时所要取消的配置参数对应的配置标识。这里,第一网络设备、第二网络设备以及终端之间可以约定在双连接工作模式下的配置参数,通过取消第二网络设备在节能工作模式下所采用的配置参数对应的配置标识,可以对诸如公共信道配置信息、RRM测量的配置信息、CSI测量的配置信息等参数进行重置,也即认为采用双连接工作模式下的配置参数,从而使得第一网络设备可以不再询问双连接工作模式下的配置参数,降低信令开支。Wherein, in 402 shown in FIG. 4, when the first network device sends a request to the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode, in addition to requesting the second network device to enter the dual-connection working mode, it can be carried to query the second network device. The configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter to be cancelled when the network device enters the dual-connection working mode. Here, the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal can agree on the configuration parameters in the dual-connection working mode. By canceling the configuration identifiers corresponding to the configuration parameters adopted by the second network device in the energy-saving working mode, the Parameters such as common channel configuration information, RRM measurement configuration information, CSI measurement configuration information and other parameters are reset, that is, the configuration parameters in the dual-connection working mode are considered to be adopted, so that the first network device can no longer inquire about the dual-connection working mode Under the configuration parameters, reduce signaling expenses.
在图4所示的403中,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的响应信息中,除了包括指示是否可以进入双连接工作模式外,还包括所要取消的配置标识。具体的,第二网络设备可以利用bitmap的方式指示所取消的配置参数对应的配置标识。假设第二网络设备预先配置了5组配置参数,当在节能工作状态下,第二网络设备采用配置标识2对应的配置参数时,可以将bitmap设置为“00000”,从而指示取消配置标识2对应的配置参数。In 403 shown in FIG. 4, the response message sent by the second network device to the first network device not only indicates whether the dual connection working mode can be entered, but also includes the configuration identifier to be cancelled. Specifically, the second network device may use a bitmap to indicate the configuration identifier corresponding to the cancelled configuration parameter. Assuming that the second network device is pre-configured with 5 sets of configuration parameters, when the second network device adopts the configuration parameters corresponding to configuration identification 2 in the energy-saving working state, the bitmap can be set to "00000", thereby instructing to cancel the configuration identification 2 correspondence Configuration parameters.
在图4所示的404中,第一网络设备向终端发送的用于指示进入节能工作模式的第一指示信息中,该第一指示信息除了包括用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息、用于指示在节能工作模式下第二网络设备的载波的状态信息中的一项或多项外,还包括用于指示第二网络设备进入双连接工作模式时所要取消的配置参数对应的配置标识。In 404 shown in FIG. 4, in the first indication information used to instruct to enter the energy-saving working mode sent by the first network device to the terminal, the first indication information in addition to the first indication information used to indicate that the second network device is in the energy-saving working mode In addition to one or more of the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG and the status information used to indicate the carrier of the second network device in the energy-saving operating mode, it also includes one or more of the status information used to indicate the second network device to enter dual-connection operation The configuration identifier corresponding to the configuration parameter to be cancelled in the mode.
上述结合图2-图5主要从不同设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。下面将结合图6至图9描述执行本申请实施例提供的方案的设备。可以理解的是,第一网络设备、第二网络设备和终端为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同的方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请实施例的技术方案的范围。The foregoing describes the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between different devices in combination with FIG. 2 to FIG. 5. The following describes the equipment that executes the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application in conjunction with FIG. 6 to FIG. 9. It can be understood that, in order to implement the above-mentioned functions, the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function. In combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed in the present application, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered as going beyond the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对第一网络设备、第二网络设备和终端等进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiments of the present application can divide functional units of the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal according to the above method examples. For example, each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be divided. Integrated in a processing unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图5示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的一种通信装置的一种可能的示例性框图,该装置500可以以软件、硬件或软硬结合的形式存在。图5示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的一种可能的示意性框图。装置500包括:处理单元502和通信单元503。处理单元502用于对装置的动作进行控制管理。通信单元503用于支持装置与其他设备的通信。装置还可以包括存储单元501,用于存储装置的程序代码和数据。In the case of an integrated unit, FIG. 5 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of a communication device involved in an embodiment of the present application. The device 500 may exist in the form of software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. . Fig. 5 shows a possible schematic block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application. The device 500 includes: a processing unit 502 and a communication unit 503. The processing unit 502 is used to control and manage the actions of the device. The communication unit 503 is used to support communication between the device and other devices. The device may also include a storage unit 501 for storing program codes and data of the device.
图6所示的装置600可以是本申请实施例所涉及的第一网络设备、第二网络网设备。The apparatus 600 shown in FIG. 6 may be the first network device and the second network device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
当图6所示的装置600为第一网络设备时,处理单元602能够支持装置600执行上述各方法示例中由第一网络设备完成的动作,例如,处理单元602支持装置600执行例如图2中确定201是否满足工作模式转换的触发条件动作,图4中的确定401中是否满足由节能工作模式转换为双连接工作模式的触发条件动作,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信单元603能够支持装置600与第二网络设备、终端等之间的通信,例如,通信单元603支持装置600执行图2中的步骤202、203、204、205,图3中的步骤302、303、304、305、306,图4中的步骤402、步骤403、步骤404、步骤405,图5中的步骤501、步骤502和/或其他相关的通信过程。When the device 600 shown in FIG. 6 is the first network device, the processing unit 602 can support the device 600 to perform the actions completed by the first network device in the foregoing method examples. For example, the processing unit 602 supports the device 600 to perform, for example, the actions shown in FIG. It is determined whether 201 meets the trigger condition action of the working mode transition, the determination 401 in FIG. 4 meets the trigger condition action of transition from the energy-saving working mode to the dual-connection working mode, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein. The communication unit 603 can support communication between the device 600 and the second network device, terminal, etc., for example, the communication unit 603 supports the device 600 to perform steps 202, 203, 204, and 205 in FIG. 2 and steps 302 and 303 in FIG. 3 , 304, 305, 306, step 402, step 403, step 404, step 405 in FIG. 4, step 501, step 502 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
当图6所示的装置600为第二网络设备时,处理单元602能够支持装置600执行上述各方法示例中由第二网络设备完成的动作,例如,处理单元602支持装置600执行图2中处理202中的切换请求、生成207中的工作模式进入确认,图3中的生成301中的触发条件确认、处理303中的响应信息、生成307中的工作模式进入确认,图4中的处理402中的工作模式转请求、处理406中的随机接入请求、生成407中的工作模式进入确认,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信单元603能够支持装置600与第一网络设备、终端等之间的通信,例如,通信单元603支持装置600执行图2中的步骤202、203、206,图3中的步骤302、303、306,图4中的步骤402、403、406,图5中的步骤501,和/或其他相关的通信过程。When the apparatus 600 shown in FIG. 6 is a second network device, the processing unit 602 can support the apparatus 600 to perform the actions completed by the second network device in the above-mentioned method examples. For example, the processing unit 602 supports the apparatus 600 to perform the processing in FIG. 2 Switching request in 202, work mode entry confirmation in generation 207, trigger condition confirmation in generation 301 in Figure 3, response information in processing 303, and work mode entry confirmation in generation 307, in process 402 in Figure 4 The working mode transfer request in 406, the random access request in processing 406, the working mode entry confirmation in generating 407, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein. The communication unit 603 can support communication between the device 600 and the first network device, terminal, etc., for example, the communication unit 603 supports the device 600 to perform steps 202, 203, and 206 in FIG. 2 and steps 302, 303, and 306 in FIG. 3 , Steps 402, 403, 406 in FIG. 4, step 501 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
示例性地,处理单元602可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,单元和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信单元603可以是通信接口,该通信接口是统称,在具体实现中,该通信接口可以包括一个或多个接口。存储单元601可以是存储器。Exemplarily, the processing unit 602 may be a processor or a controller, such as a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), or an application specific integrated circuit (application integrated circuit). -specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, units, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor may also be a combination for realizing computing functions, for example, including a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on. The communication unit 603 may be a communication interface, and the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include one or more interfaces. The storage unit 601 may be a memory.
当处理单元602为处理器,通信单元603为通信接口,存储单元601为存储器时,本申请实施例所涉及的装置600可以为图6所示的通信装置700。When the processing unit 602 is a processor, the communication unit 603 is a communication interface, and the storage unit 601 is a memory, the device 600 involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the communication device 700 shown in FIG. 6.
参阅图7所示,该装置700包括:处理器702和通信接口703。进一步地,该装置700还可以包括存储器701。可选的,装置700还可以包括总线704。其中,通信接口703、处理器702以及存储器701可以通过总线704相互连接;总线704可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线704可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图7中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Referring to FIG. 7, the device 700 includes: a processor 702 and a communication interface 703. Further, the device 700 may further include a memory 701. Optionally, the apparatus 700 may further include a bus 704. Among them, the communication interface 703, the processor 702, and the memory 701 can be connected to each other through a bus 704; the bus 704 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) Bus and so on. The bus 704 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 7, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
其中,处理器702可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器701内的程序,执行所述装置700的各种功能。The processor 702 may execute various functions of the apparatus 700 by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701.
示例性地,图7所示的通信装置700可以是本申请实施例所涉及的第一网络设备、第二网络设备。Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 700 shown in FIG. 7 may be the first network device and the second network device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
当装置700为第一网络设备时,处理器702可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器701内的程序,执行上述各方法示例中由第一网络设备完成的动作。当装置700为第二网络设备时,处理器702可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器701内的程序,执行上述各方法示例中由第二网络设备完成的动作。When the apparatus 700 is the first network device, the processor 702 may execute the actions performed by the first network device in the foregoing method examples by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701. When the apparatus 700 is the second network device, the processor 702 may execute the actions performed by the second network device in the foregoing method examples by running or executing a program stored in the memory 701.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图8示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的另一种装置的一种可能的示例性框图,该装置800可以以软件、硬件或软硬结合的形式存在。图8示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的一种可能的示意性框图。装置800包括:处理单元802和通信单元803。处理单元802用于对装置的动作进行控制管理。通信单元803用于支持装置与其他设备的通信。装置还可以包括存储单元801,用于存储装置的程序代码和数据。In the case of an integrated unit, FIG. 8 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of another device involved in an embodiment of the present application. The device 800 may exist in the form of software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. . FIG. 8 shows a possible schematic block diagram of a device involved in an embodiment of the present application. The device 800 includes a processing unit 802 and a communication unit 803. The processing unit 802 is used to control and manage the actions of the device. The communication unit 803 is used to support communication between the device and other devices. The device may also include a storage unit 801 for storing program codes and data of the device.
图8所示的通信装置800可以是终端设备,也可以为应用于终端设备的芯片。处理单元802能够支持装置800执行上述各方法示例中由终端设备完成的动作,例如,处理单元802支持装置800执行例如图2中的处理204中的第一指示信息的动作,图3中的处理304中的第一指示信息的动作,图4中的处理404中的第一指示信息的动作,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信单元803能够支持装置800与第一网络设备和第二网络设备等之间的通信,例如,通信单元803支持装置800执行图2中的步骤204、205,图3中的步骤304、305,图4中的步骤404、405、406,图5中的步骤502,和/或其他相关的通信过程。The communication device 800 shown in FIG. 8 may be a terminal device or a chip applied to a terminal device. The processing unit 802 can support the device 800 to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned method examples. For example, the processing unit 802 supports the device 800 to perform, for example, the action of the first indication information in the processing 204 in FIG. 2, and the processing in FIG. 3 The action of the first indication information in 304, the action of the first indication information in processing 404 in FIG. 4, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein. The communication unit 803 can support the communication between the device 800 and the first network device and the second network device, etc., for example, the communication unit 803 supports the device 800 to perform steps 204 and 205 in FIG. 2 and steps 304 and 305 in FIG. 3, Steps 404, 405, and 406 in FIG. 4, step 502 in FIG. 5, and/or other related communication processes.
示例性地,处理单元802可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是CPU,通用处理器,DSP,ASIC,FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,单元和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信单元803可以是通信接口,该通信接口是统称,在具体实现中,该通信接口可以包括一个或多个接口。存储单元801可以是存储器。Exemplarily, the processing unit 802 may be a processor or a controller, such as a CPU, a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, units, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor may also be a combination for realizing computing functions, for example, including a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on. The communication unit 803 may be a communication interface, and the communication interface is a general term. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may include one or more interfaces. The storage unit 801 may be a memory.
当处理单元802为处理器,通信单元803为收发器,存储单元801为存储器时,本申请实施例所涉及的装置800可以为图9所示的终端设备。When the processing unit 802 is a processor, the communication unit 803 is a transceiver, and the storage unit 801 is a memory, the apparatus 800 involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 9.
图9示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的终端设备的一种可能的设计结构的简化示意图。所述终端设备900包括发射器901,接收器902和处理器903。其中,处理器903也可以为控制器,图9中表示为“控制器/处理器903”。可选的,所述终端设备900还可以包括调制解调处理器905,其中,调制解调处理器905可以包括编码器906、调制器907、解码器908和解调器909。FIG. 9 shows a simplified schematic diagram of a possible design structure of a terminal device involved in an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 900 includes a transmitter 901, a receiver 902, and a processor 903. The processor 903 may also be a controller, which is represented as "controller/processor 903" in FIG. 9. Optionally, the terminal device 900 may further include a modem processor 905, where the modem processor 905 may include an encoder 906, a modulator 907, a decoder 908, and a demodulator 909.
在一个示例中,发射器901调节(例如,模拟转换、滤波、放大和上变频等)该输出采样并生成上行链路信号,该上行链路信号经由天线发射给上述实施例中所述的基站。在下行链路上,天线接收上述实施例中基站发射的下行链路信号。接收器902调节(例如,滤波、放大、下变频以及数字化等)从天线接收的信号并提供输入采样。在调制解调处理器805中,编码器906接收要在上行链路上发送的业务数据和信令消息,并对业务数据和信令消息进行处理(例如,格式化、编码和交织)。调制器907进一步处理(例如,符号映射和调制)编码后的业务数据和信令消息并提供输出采样。解调器909处理(例如,解调)该输入采样并提供符号估计。解码器908处理(例如,解交织和解码)该符号估计并提供发送给终端设备900的已解码的数据和信令消息。编码器906、调制器907、解调器909和解码器908可以由合成的调制解调处理器905来实现。这些单元根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术(例如,LTE、5G及其他演进系统的接入技术)来进行处理。需要说明的是,当终端设备900不包括调制解调处理器905时,调制解调处理器905的上述功能也可以由处理器903完成。In one example, the transmitter 901 adjusts (for example, analog conversion, filtering, amplification, and upconversion, etc.) the output samples and generates an uplink signal, which is transmitted to the base station described in the above-mentioned embodiment via an antenna. . On the downlink, the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the base station in the above embodiment. The receiver 902 adjusts (eg, filters, amplifies, downconverts, and digitizes, etc.) the signal received from the antenna and provides input samples. In the modem processor 805, the encoder 906 receives service data and signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink, and processes the service data and signaling messages (for example, formatting, encoding, and interleaving). The modulator 907 further processes (for example, symbol mapping and modulation) the encoded service data and signaling messages and provides output samples. The demodulator 909 processes (e.g., demodulates) the input samples and provides symbol estimates. The decoder 908 processes (eg, deinterleaves and decodes) the symbol estimation and provides decoded data and signaling messages sent to the terminal device 900. The encoder 906, the modulator 907, the demodulator 909, and the decoder 908 may be implemented by a synthesized modem processor 905. These units are processed according to the radio access technology adopted by the radio access network (for example, LTE, 5G and other access technologies of the evolved system). It should be noted that when the terminal device 900 does not include the modem processor 905, the foregoing functions of the modem processor 905 may also be performed by the processor 903.
处理器903对终端设备900的动作进行控制管理,用于执行上述本申请实施例中由终端设备900进行的处理过程。例如,处理器903还用于执行3、图4所示方法中涉及终端设备的处理过程和/或本申请所描述的技术方案的其他过程。The processor 903 controls and manages the actions of the terminal device 900, and is configured to execute the processing procedure performed by the terminal device 900 in the foregoing embodiment of the present application. For example, the processor 903 is further configured to execute the processing procedure of the terminal device in the method shown in 3 and FIG. 4 and/or other procedures of the technical solution described in this application.
进一步的,终端设备900还可以包括存储器904,存储器904用于存储用于终端设备900的程序代码和数据。Further, the terminal device 900 may further include a memory 904, and the memory 904 is configured to store program codes and data for the terminal device 900.
结合本申请实施例公开内容所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以硬件的方式来实现,也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(Read Only Memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM,EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于集中式单元的控制面实体、集中式单元的用户面实体、终端设备或统一数据存储网元中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于集中式单元的控制面实体、集中式单元的用户面实体、终端设备或统一数据存储网元中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in combination with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), and erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium may also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and the storage medium may be located in the ASIC. In addition, the ASIC may be located in the control plane entity of the centralized unit, the user plane entity of the centralized unit, terminal equipment or unified data storage network element. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the control plane entity of the centralized unit, the user plane entity of the centralized unit, terminal equipment, or unified data storage network element.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例提供的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, including a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in the foregoing method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例提供的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in the foregoing method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,该芯片可应用于通信装置,该芯片包括至少一个处理器,当该至少一个处理器执行指令时,使得该芯片或该通信装置执行上述方法实施例提供的方法,该芯片还可以包括存储器,该存储器可用于存储涉及的指令。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which can be applied to a communication device, the chip includes at least one processor, and when the at least one processor executes an instruction, the chip or the communication device executes the method provided in the embodiment. In the method, the chip may also include a memory, and the memory may be used to store related instructions.
应理解,本发明实施例中提及的处理器可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU),还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that the processor mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention may be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), or may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processors, DSPs), and application-specific integrated circuits (Central Processing Unit, CPU). Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be implemented in this application. The implementation process of the example constitutes any limitation.
还应理解,本文中涉及的第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的范围。It should also be understood that the first, second, and various numbers involved in this specification are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the present application.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (39)

  1. 一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第一网络设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device is applied to a first network device, and is characterized in that the method includes:
    确定是否满足工作模式转换的触发条件;Determine whether the trigger condition of the work mode conversion is met;
    响应于满足所述工作模式转换的触发条件,向第二网络设备发送工作模式转换请求;In response to satisfying the triggering condition of the working mode conversion, sending a working mode conversion request to the second network device;
    向与所述第二网络设备连接的终端发送用于指示所述工作模式转换的第一指示信息;Sending first instruction information for instructing the transition of the working mode to the terminal connected to the second network device;
    所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能模式,所述第二工作模式为节能模式。The working mode includes a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving mode, and the second working mode is an energy-saving mode.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。The method according to claim 1, wherein in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement signal used for radio resource management The sending period of is greater than the sending period in the first working mode.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述第二网络设备接收所述工作模式转换请求的响应信息。Receiving the response information of the working mode switching request from the second network device.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件,所述由第一工作模式转换为第二工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the triggering condition for switching the working mode comprises a triggering condition for switching from the first working mode to the second working mode, and the switching from the first working mode to The trigger conditions of the second working mode include one or more of the following:
    所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第一预设门限值;The load or resource utilization rate of the first network device is lower than a first preset threshold;
    所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率低于第二预设门限值;The load or resource utilization rate of the second network device is lower than a second preset threshold;
    所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率均低于第三预设门限值;The load or resource utilization of the first network device and the second network device are both lower than a third preset threshold;
    所述第二网络设备的能耗高于第四预设门限值,且负荷量低于第五预设门限值。The energy consumption of the second network device is higher than the fourth preset threshold, and the load is lower than the fifth preset threshold.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。The method according to claim 3, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 5, wherein the response information includes at least one of the following:
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;Common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。The configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  7. 根据权利要求4-6之一所述的方法,其特在在于,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 4-6, wherein the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态 信息;Used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;Information used to indicate the state of the carrier of the second network device in the second operating mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息。Used to indicate the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
  8. 根据权利要求4-7之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 4-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述终端接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;Receiving second indication information from the terminal, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is complete;
    基于接收到的所述第二指示信息,向所述第二网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。Based on the received second instruction information, sending third instruction information to the second network device, where the third instruction information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  9. 根据权利要求1-3之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换的触发条件包括由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式的触发条件,所述由所述第二工作模式转换为所述第一工作模式的触发条件包括以下一项或多项:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the trigger condition for the transition of the operating mode comprises a trigger condition for the transition from the second operating mode to the first operating mode, and the The trigger condition for the second working mode to switch to the first working mode includes one or more of the following:
    所述第一网络设备的负荷量或资源利用率高于预设门限值;The load or resource utilization rate of the first network device is higher than a preset threshold;
    所述终端请求的数据传输速率高于所述第一网络设备的数据传输速率;The data transmission rate requested by the terminal is higher than the data transmission rate of the first network device;
    所述第一网络的能耗大于预设门限值、且在所述第一工作模式下所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备的能耗之和小于所述第一网络的能耗。The energy consumption of the first network is greater than a preset threshold, and the sum of the energy consumption of the first network device and the second network device in the first working mode is less than the energy consumption of the first network Consumption.
  10. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式。The method according to claim 3, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 10, wherein the response information includes at least one of the following:
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;Configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下公共信道配置信息;Common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
  12. 根据权利要求9-11之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;Information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;Information used to indicate the state of the carrier of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息;Used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述终端接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。Receiving second indication information from the terminal, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the configuration of the terminal is complete.
  14. 根据权利要求1-3之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述第二网络设备接收所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;Receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the second network device;
    将所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息发送至所述终端;Sending the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the terminal;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;The configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, One or more of configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement;
    所述第一指示信息包括:所述配置标识。The first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式;The method according to claim 14, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode;
    所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The first indication information further includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;Used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。Used to indicate carrier status information of the second network device in the second operating mode.
  16. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式;The method according to claim 14, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode;
    所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The first indication information further includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;Information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。Used to indicate carrier status information of the second network device in the first working mode.
  17. 一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于第二网络设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A working mode conversion method of a dual-connection network device is applied to a second network device, and is characterized in that the method includes:
    从第一网络设备接收工作模式转换请求;Receiving a working mode conversion request from the first network device;
    基于所述工作模式转换请求,向所述第一网络设备发送所述工作模式转换请求的响应信息;Based on the working mode conversion request, sending response information of the working mode conversion request to the first network device;
    所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。The working mode includes a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and the second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。The method according to claim 17, wherein in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement signal used for radio resource management The sending period is greater than the sending period in the first working mode.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the second working mode.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 19, wherein the response information includes at least one of the following:
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下公共信道配置信息;Common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。The configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述第一网络设备接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成;Receiving third indication information from the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete;
    基于所述第三指示信息,进入所述第二工作模式。Based on the third indication information, enter the second working mode.
  22. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式转换请求包括请求所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the working mode conversion request comprises requesting the second network device to enter the first working mode.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应信息包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 22, wherein the response information includes at least one of the following:
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下物理随机接入信道PRACH的配置信息;Configuration information of the physical random access channel PRACH of the second network device in the first working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下公共信道配置信息;Common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode;
    所述第二网络设备在所述第一工作模式下用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息。Configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the method further comprises:
    从终端接收随机接入请求;Receive a random access request from the terminal;
    响应于确定所述终端随机接入成功,进入所述第一工作模式。In response to determining that the terminal has succeeded in random access, enter the first working mode.
  25. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述第一网络设备发送所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;Sending the configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode to the first network device;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;The configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, One or more of configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement;
    所述响应信息包括:所述配置标识。The response information includes: the configuration identifier.
  26. 一种双连接网络设备的工作模式转换方法,应用于终端,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A working mode conversion method of dual-connection network equipment, applied to a terminal, characterized in that the method includes:
    从第一网络设备接收用于指示第二网络设备的工作模式转换的第一指示信息;Receiving, from the first network device, first indication information for instructing the conversion of the working mode of the second network device;
    基于所述第一指示信息,对接入所述第二网络设备的终端的参数进行配置;Configure the parameters of the terminal accessing the second network device based on the first indication information;
    所述工作模式包括:第一工作模式和第二工作模式,其中,所述第一工作模式为非节能工作模式,所述第二工作模式为节能工作模式。The working mode includes a first working mode and a second working mode, wherein the first working mode is a non-energy-saving working mode, and the second working mode is an energy-saving working mode.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二工作模式下,所述第二网络设备的同步信号以及主系统信息MIB二者、和/或用于无线资源管理RRM测量信号的发送周期大于所述第一工作模式下的发送周期。The method according to claim 26, wherein, in the second working mode, both the synchronization signal of the second network device and the main system information MIB, and/or the RRM measurement signal used for radio resource management The sending period of is greater than the sending period in the first working mode.
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法,其特在在于,所述工作模式为所述第二工作模式;The method according to claim 26 or 27, wherein the working mode is the second working mode;
    所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The first indication information includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;Used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;Information used to indicate the state of the carrier of the second network device in the second operating mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息。Used to indicate the common channel configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode.
  29. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述工作模式为所述第一工作模式;The method according to claim 26 or 27, wherein the working mode is the first working mode;
    所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:The first indication information includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;Information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息;Information used to indicate the state of the carrier of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的公共信道配置信息;Used to indicate common channel configuration information of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息;Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for radio resource management RRM measurement in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息。Used to indicate configuration information used by the second network device for channel state information CSI measurement in the first working mode.
  30. 根据权利要求26-29之一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 26-29, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端配置完成。Sending second indication information to the first network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal configuration is complete.
  31. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 29, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述第二网络设备发送随机接入请求。Sending a random access request to the second network device.
  32. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein the method further comprises:
    从所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备在所述第二工作模式下的配置信息;Receiving configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode from the first network device;
    所述第二网络设备在第二工作模式下的配置信息包括一组或多组配置参数;所述配置 参数包括:配置标识,所述配置参数还包括所述配置标识对应的公共信道配置信息、用于无线资源管理RRM测量的配置信息和用于信道状态信息CSI测量的配置信息中的一项或多项;The configuration information of the second network device in the second working mode includes one or more sets of configuration parameters; the configuration parameters include: a configuration identifier, and the configuration parameters also include common channel configuration information corresponding to the configuration identifier, One or more of configuration information used for radio resource management RRM measurement and configuration information used for channel state information CSI measurement;
    所述第一指示信息包括:所述配置标识。The first indication information includes: the configuration identifier.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备进入所述第二工作模式;The method according to claim 32, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the second network device to enter the second working mode;
    所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The first indication information further includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区的状态信息;Used to indicate the status information of the cells in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the second working mode;
    用于指示在所述第二工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。Used to indicate carrier status information of the second network device in the second operating mode.
  34. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备进入所述第一工作模式;The method according to claim 32, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the second network device to enter the first working mode;
    所述第一指示信息还包括以下至少一项:The first indication information further includes at least one of the following:
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的小区集合SCG中的小区状态的信息;Information used to indicate the cell status in the cell set SCG of the second network device in the first working mode;
    用于指示在所述第一工作模式下所述第二网络设备的载波的状态信息。Used to indicate carrier status information of the second network device in the first working mode.
  35. 一种通信装置,包括处理器,其特征在于,所述处理器用于从存储器读取并运行指令,以实现如权利要求1-16任一所述的方法。A communication device comprising a processor, wherein the processor is used to read and execute instructions from a memory to implement the method according to any one of claims 1-16.
  36. 一种通信装置,包括处理器,其特征在于,所述处理器用于从存储器读取并运行指令,以实现如权利要求17-25任一所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor, characterized in that the processor is used to read and execute instructions from a memory to implement the method according to any one of claims 17-25.
  37. 一种通信装置,包括处理器,其特征在于,所述处理器用于从存储器读取并运行指令,以实现如权利要求26-34任一所述的方法。A communication device comprising a processor, wherein the processor is used to read and execute instructions from a memory to implement the method according to any one of claims 26-34.
  38. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求35-37之一所述的通信装置。A communication system, characterized by comprising the communication device according to any one of claims 35-37.
  39. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program runs on a computer,
    使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-34中任意一项所述的方法。The computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-34.
PCT/CN2019/104041 2019-09-02 2019-09-02 Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices WO2021042243A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980097116.2A CN113906822A (en) 2019-09-02 2019-09-02 Working mode conversion method and device of dual-connection network equipment
PCT/CN2019/104041 WO2021042243A1 (en) 2019-09-02 2019-09-02 Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/104041 WO2021042243A1 (en) 2019-09-02 2019-09-02 Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021042243A1 true WO2021042243A1 (en) 2021-03-11

Family

ID=74851988

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/104041 WO2021042243A1 (en) 2019-09-02 2019-09-02 Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113906822A (en)
WO (1) WO2021042243A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114026902A (en) * 2021-09-24 2022-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Method and device for determining cell configuration
WO2024031443A1 (en) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-15 富士通株式会社 Information indication apparatus and method, and information receiving apparatus and method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104105109A (en) * 2014-08-08 2014-10-15 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Method and system for informing of quick on-off state of micro cell base station and base station
WO2015047051A1 (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for determining radio resource control configuration in wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity and apparatus thereof
CN104811962A (en) * 2014-01-24 2015-07-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Small cell state switching method and small cell state switching device
CN105451364A (en) * 2014-08-07 2016-03-30 上海贝尔股份有限公司 Pscell open/close method for dual connection system and eNBs

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015047051A1 (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for determining radio resource control configuration in wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity and apparatus thereof
CN104811962A (en) * 2014-01-24 2015-07-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Small cell state switching method and small cell state switching device
CN105451364A (en) * 2014-08-07 2016-03-30 上海贝尔股份有限公司 Pscell open/close method for dual connection system and eNBs
CN104105109A (en) * 2014-08-08 2014-10-15 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Method and system for informing of quick on-off state of micro cell base station and base station

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ZTE: "Enhanced small cell on/off procedures", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-141404 ENHANCED SMALL CELL ONOFF PROCEDURES, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Shenzhen, China; 20140331 - 20140404, 22 March 2014 (2014-03-22), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP050813840 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114026902A (en) * 2021-09-24 2022-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Method and device for determining cell configuration
CN114026902B (en) * 2021-09-24 2024-06-11 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Method and device for determining cell configuration
WO2024031443A1 (en) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-15 富士通株式会社 Information indication apparatus and method, and information receiving apparatus and method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113906822A (en) 2022-01-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102346477B1 (en) Communication method and wireless communication device
US10623981B2 (en) Information transmission method, apparatus, and system
EP3860176B1 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for obtaining capability information of terminal
EP4192082A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2021047478A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021042243A1 (en) Working mode conversion method and apparatus for dual-connectivity network devices
WO2020088417A1 (en) Bylink resource configuration method and device
US20230328670A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus, terminal device, and network side device
US20240154759A1 (en) Aperiodic srs triggering mechanism enhancement
JP2024073481A (en) Communication method and device
EP3823387B1 (en) Information indicating method and apparatus
EP3833146A1 (en) Downlink control information transmission method and apparatus
WO2021259358A1 (en) Bandwidth part switching method and apparatus
US20240080164A1 (en) Switching of search space set group of target cell, and control method and apparatus therefor
US20230188272A1 (en) Uplink and downlink configuration enhancement
EP3869831B1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN113766660B (en) SR sending method and terminal
JP7512383B2 (en) Communication method and device
WO2018148500A1 (en) User equipment hysteresis for signal blockage detection
US20240106610A1 (en) Systems, methods, and devices for dynamic adaption of different attenna configuration communications
WO2024051428A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
US11082868B2 (en) Service access method and device to determine the availability of a service path for service access
US20240147514A1 (en) Inter-ue communication coordination and collision response
WO2023010518A1 (en) Acknowledgement of beam report
WO2022151372A1 (en) Physical uplink control channel secondary cell activation in new radio

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19944271

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19944271

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1